683188

Canon i-SENSYS MF112 Manual

11
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/390
Next page
MF113w / MF112
User's Guide
USRMA-3142-00 2018-08 en Copyright CANON INC. 2018
Contents
Setting Up
............................................................................................................................................................ 2
Main Functions ......................................................................................................................................................... 3
Preparations Required Before Use ............................................................................................................................. 4
Preventing Unauthorized Access ................................................................................................................................ 5
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
Setting the Date/Time ............................................................................................................................................... 9
Setting Up the Network Environment ...................................................................................................................... 11
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN ..................................................................................................................... 13
Connecting to a Wired LAN .................................................................................................................................. 14
Connecting to a Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................... 15
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ....................................................................................... 17
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode ........................................................................................... 19
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ....................................................................................... 21
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ...................................................................................... 23
Checking the SSID and Network Key ............................................................................................................... 26
Setting IP Addresses ........................................................................................................................................... 27
Setting IPv4 Address ..................................................................................................................................... 28
Setting IPv6 Addresses .................................................................................................................................. 31
Viewing Network Settings .................................................................................................................................... 34
Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer ...................................................................................... 36
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ........................................................................................... 37
Conguring Printer Ports ............................................................................................................................... 39
Setting Up Print Server .................................................................................................................................. 43
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ......................................................................................... 46
Conguring Ethernet Settings ........................................................................................................................ 47
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ...................................................................................................... 49
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .............................................................................................. 50
Conguring DNS .......................................................................................................................................... 51
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ......................................................................................... 54
Conguring SNTP ......................................................................................................................................... 58
Installing Drivers .................................................................................................................................................... 60
Conguring Scan Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 61
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner ........................................................................................................... 62
Basic Operations .......................................................................................................................................... 64
Parts and Their Functions ........................................................................................................................................ 67
Front Side .......................................................................................................................................................... 68
Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................... 70
Drawer .............................................................................................................................................................. 71
Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 72
Turning ON the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 74
Turning OFF the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 75
I
Using the Operation Panel .......................................................................................................................................
76
Basic Screens ..................................................................................................................................................... 77
Home Screen ............................................................................................................................................... 78
<Status Monitor> Screen ............................................................................................................................... 79
Message Display ........................................................................................................................................... 80
Basic Operation .................................................................................................................................................. 81
Entering Text ...................................................................................................................................................... 83
Placing Originals ..................................................................................................................................................... 84
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................................................................... 86
Loading Paper in the Drawer ................................................................................................................................ 88
Loading Envelopes .............................................................................................................................................. 92
Loading Preprinted Paper .................................................................................................................................... 94
Specifying Paper Size and Type ............................................................................................................................. 95
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer .................................................................................................. 96
Registering a Custom Paper Size .................................................................................................................... 97
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed .................................................................................................................. 98
Customizing the Display .......................................................................................................................................... 99
Customizing the Home Screen ........................................................................................................................... 100
Changing the Default Settings for Functions .......................................................................................................... 101
Entering Sleep Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 102
Copying .............................................................................................................................................................. 104
Basic Copy Operations ........................................................................................................................................... 105
Canceling Copies .............................................................................................................................................. 108
Checking the Copying Status .............................................................................................................................. 109
Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality ................................................................................................................... 110
Selecting the Type of Original for Copying ........................................................................................................... 111
Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness) ...................................................................................................... 112
Useful Copy Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 113
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1) .......................................................................................... 114
Collating Copies by Page ................................................................................................................................... 115
Making ID Card Copies ...................................................................................................................................... 116
Printing .............................................................................................................................................................. 118
Printing from a Computer ..................................................................................................................................... 119
Canceling Prints ............................................................................................................................................... 121
Checking the Printing Status and Log .................................................................................................................. 123
Scanning ........................................................................................................................................................... 126
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals ................................................................................................................ 127
Scanning and Saving to a Computer .................................................................................................................... 128
Scanning Using the Shortcut Key ........................................................................................................................ 130
Canceling Sending Documents ........................................................................................................................... 133
Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan) .......................................................................................................... 134
II
Scanning Documents from an Application ...........................................................................................................
135
Using ScanGear MF ........................................................................................................................................... 137
Linking with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................ 139
Connecting with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................................ 140
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) ........................................................................................ 141
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) ............................................................................................................. 142
Utilizing the Machine through Applications ........................................................................................................... 145
Using AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................................... 146
Printing with AirPrint ........................................................................................................................................ 151
Scanning with AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................... 154
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ................................................................................................................................. 156
Using Google Cloud Print ....................................................................................................................................... 157
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control ....................................................................................................... 159
Managing the Machine ........................................................................................................................ 161
Setting Access Privileges ....................................................................................................................................... 163
Setting the System Manager PIN ........................................................................................................................ 164
Setting a Remote UI PIN .................................................................................................................................... 166
Conguring the Network Security Settings ............................................................................................................ 168
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ..................................................................................................... 170
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings .................................................................................................. 171
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings .............................................................................................. 174
Changing Port Numbers .................................................................................................................................... 176
Setting a Proxy ................................................................................................................................................. 177
Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS .......................................................................................................... 179
Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication ...................................................................... 181
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) ................................................................................... 184
Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication ...................................................................... 187
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings .................................................................................................. 189
Restricting the Machine's Functions ...................................................................................................................... 193
Restricting USB Functions .................................................................................................................................. 194
Disabling HTTP Communication ......................................................................................................................... 195
Disabling Remote UI ......................................................................................................................................... 196
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ............................................................................................ 197
Starting Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................... 198
Checking the Status and Logs ............................................................................................................................ 201
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ........................................................................................................... 205
Updating the Firmware ......................................................................................................................................... 208
Initializing Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 210
Setting Menu List ...................................................................................................................................... 213
<Network Settings> .............................................................................................................................................. 214
<Preferences> ....................................................................................................................................................... 223
III
<Timer Settings>
................................................................................................................................................... 227
<Copy Settings> .................................................................................................................................................... 231
<Scan Settings> ..................................................................................................................................................... 233
<Printer Settings> ................................................................................................................................................. 234
<Adjustment/Maintenance> .................................................................................................................................. 236
<System Management Settings> ............................................................................................................................ 241
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 249
Regular Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................. 251
Cleaning the Exterior ........................................................................................................................................ 252
Cleaning the Platen Glass .................................................................................................................................. 253
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 254
Replacing the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................................... 255
Replacing the Drum Cartridge ............................................................................................................................... 258
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables .................................................................................................. 262
Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 263
Viewing the Counter Value .................................................................................................................................... 265
Printing Reports and Lists ..................................................................................................................................... 266
Consumables ........................................................................................................................................................ 268
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................... 272
Common Problems ................................................................................................................................................ 274
Installation/Settings Problems ........................................................................................................................... 275
Copying/Printing Problems ................................................................................................................................ 279
When You Cannot Print Properly ............................................................................................................................ 282
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ................................................................................................................... 284
Paper Creases or Curls ...................................................................................................................................... 293
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ..................................................................................................................................... 295
A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed .................................................................... 296
Countermeasures for Each Message ................................................................................................................... 297
Countermeasures for Each Error Code ................................................................................................................ 307
Clearing Paper Jams .............................................................................................................................................. 308
Paper Jams inside the Machine ........................................................................................................................... 309
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved ......................................................................................................................... 313
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 315
Third Party Software ............................................................................................................................................. 316
Feature Highlights ................................................................................................................................................ 317
Going Green and Saving Money ......................................................................................................................... 318
Improving Eciency ......................................................................................................................................... 319
Going Digital .................................................................................................................................................... 320
So Much More .................................................................................................................................................. 322
Specications ....................................................................................................................................................... 324
Main Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 325
IV
Available Paper ................................................................................................................................................
328
Scan Function .................................................................................................................................................. 330
Printer Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 331
Management Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 332
System Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 333
Network Environment ....................................................................................................................................... 334
Manuals and Their Contents .................................................................................................................................. 335
Using User's Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 336
Screen Layout of User's Guide ............................................................................................................................ 337
Viewing User's Guide ........................................................................................................................................ 340
Basic Windows Operations .................................................................................................................................... 341
Notice .................................................................................................................................................................. 349
V
Setting Up
Setting Up ...............................................................................................................................................................
2
Main Functions ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
Preparations Required Before Use ....................................................................................................................... 4
Preventing Unauthorized Access .......................................................................................................................... 5
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide ........................................................................................................................ 7
Setting the Date/Time ........................................................................................................................................... 9
Setting Up the Network Environment ............................................................................................................... 11
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN .............................................................................................................. 13
Connecting to a Wired LAN ............................................................................................................................. 14
Connecting to a Wireless LAN ......................................................................................................................... 15
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ............................................................................. 17
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode .................................................................................. 19
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ............................................................................. 21
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ............................................................................ 23
Checking the SSID and Network Key ........................................................................................................ 26
Setting IP Addresses ....................................................................................................................................... 27
Setting IPv4 Address ................................................................................................................................ 28
Setting IPv6 Addresses ............................................................................................................................ 31
Viewing Network Settings ............................................................................................................................... 34
Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer ............................................................................ 36
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ................................................................................. 37
Conguring Printer Ports ......................................................................................................................... 39
Setting Up Print Server ............................................................................................................................ 43
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................... 46
Conguring Ethernet Settings ................................................................................................................. 47
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ............................................................................................. 49
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .................................................................................... 50
Conguring DNS ...................................................................................................................................... 51
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ............................................................................... 54
Conguring SNTP .................................................................................................................................... 58
Installing Drivers ................................................................................................................................................. 60
Conguring Scan Settings ................................................................................................................................... 61
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner ................................................................................................... 62
Setting Up
1
Setting Up
2JRY-000
Befor
e using the functions of the machine, the environmental conditions must be set in advance. To begin with, check
the sequences of ow required to complete the setup, and then perform the actual settings.
Preparations Required
Befor
e Use(P. 4)
● The functions installed on the machine vary depending on the model you pur
chased. Before using the
machine, see
Main Functions(P. 3) and check the available functions.
Conguring Initial Settings of the Machine (Setup Guide)
● Y
ou can easily congure the initial settings required to use the machine, such as date, time, and network
settings, by following the on-screen guidance.
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 7)
Setting Up
2
Main Functions
2JRY-001
This manual co
vers all the functions of the model series you purchased. Before getting started, check which functions
are available on the model you purchased.
: With function : Without function
Function MF113w MF112
Copy
Print
Fax
Scan
2-sided printing
Wired LAN connection
Wireless LAN connection
Remote UI
Keys and Certicates
Linking with Mobile Devices
● For the available driver types, see the CD-ROM/D
VD-ROM supplied with the machine, or see the Canon
website (http://www.canon.com/).
LINKS
Viewing User's Guide(P. 340)
Setting Up
3
Preparations Required Before Use
2JRY-002
Set up the machine follo
wing steps 1 to 4 in order. For more information about a particular step, click on the link to go
to the corresponding section. In addition, to use the machine safely, also check
Preventing Unauthorized
Access(P
. 5) .
Step 1 Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 7)
Step 2 Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11)
● Congur
e the network settings that are not covered in the Setup Guide. If you do not need
to use the Setup Guide, congure the network settings from here.
Step 3 Installing Drivers(P. 60)
Step 4 Conguring Scan Settings
(P. 61)
Setting from the Remote UI
● When the network envir
onment settings are complete, you can eciently set the machine from a computer
using Remote UI.
Starting Remote UI(P. 198)
Setting Up
4
Preventing Unauthorized Access
2JRY-003
This section describes the security measur
es on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is
a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines
connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a
variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,
and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to
reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to
threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary
settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected
to the network.
Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network
Assigning a Private IP Address(P. 5)
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission(P. 6)
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (P. 6)
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Machine(P. 6)
Assigning a Private IP Address
An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is
used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication
within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/
multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage
due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,
your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local
area network, such as a LAN in the company.
Global IP Address
Can be accessed fr
om the external network
Private IP Address
Can be accessed from the users within a local area network
Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to conrm the IP address,
assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is
found in one of the following ranges.
Ranges for Private IP addresses
● Fr
om 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
● From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
● From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
For information on how to conrm the IP address, see
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28) .
● If a global IP addr
ess is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment
to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a rewall that prevents
Setting Up
5
access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/
multifunction machine, contact your network administr
ator.
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission
A r
ewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/
intrusions to a local area network. You can use a rewall on your network environment to block access from the
external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specied IP address of the
external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP
address lter. For information on how to set up an IP address lter, see
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall
Settings(P
. 171) .
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication
For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see
Conguring the Network Security Settings
(P. 168) ,
and on the procedures to specify, see
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 179) .
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Machine
If a malicious thir
d party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to
information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printers/multifunction machines
enable you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.
Setting PIN to Each Function
● Setting PIN for Using Remote UI
For mor
e information, see
Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 166) .
● Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings
For mor
e information, see
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164) .
Listed abo
ve are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on
the other security measures, see
Managing the Machine(P. 161) and tak
e necessary security measures for
preventing unauthorized access to suit your environment.
Setting Up
6
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide
2JRY-004
When the machine is turned on (
Turning ON the Machine(P. 74) ) for the rst time, the Setup Guide starts up to
assist you to congur
e the initial settings of the machine by following the on-screen guidance. In the Setup Guide, the
setting screens are displayed in the following order.
Step 1 Setting the Display Language and the Country or Region
Set the language to be displayed on the operation panel screen or in reports, as well as the
country or r
egion where the machine will be used.
1
Select a language.
2
Select a country or region.
Step 2 Setting the Date and Time
Adjust the machine's date/time.
1
Select a time zone.
What is UTC?
● Coor
dinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the
world regulates clocks and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required
for Internet communications.
2
Enter the date and time, and press
.
Step 3 Setting the Access Security Measures
Set a PIN to access the Remote UI. Because the Remote UI can be used to change the machine
settings fr
om a computer, setting of a PIN is recommended.
1
Select <Yes>.
● If you select <No>, PIN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 4.
● You can also set the access security measure of the Remote UI later.
Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 166)
2
Enter the PIN, and then select <Apply>.
3
Enter the same PIN, and then select <Apply>.
Step 4 Setting the Wireless LAN
Congure the settings to connect to the network using the wir
eless LAN.
1
Select <Yes>.
● Select <No> to nish the Setup Guide without conguring the wireless LAN
settings. Read the displayed message, and press .
2
Select <OK>.
3
Select the setting method.
● For more information about the wireless LAN settings, see Connecting to a
Wireless LAN(P. 15) .
Setting Up
7
4
Read the message that is displayed, and press .
➠ When the Setup Guide is complete, the Home scr
een appears.
Setting Up
8
Setting the Date/Time
2JRY-005
Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time ar
e used as the reference for the functions specifying the
time, therefore, they need to be set accurately.
Setting the Time Zone(P. 9)
Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 9)
Setting the Daylight Saving Time(P. 10)
Setting the Time Zone
If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also changed accordingly.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time Zone>.
3
Select the time zone.
What is UTC?
● Coor
dinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and
time. Time differences exist depending on the country or area where the machine is used. The correct UTC
time zone setting is required for Internet communications.
Setting the Current Date and Time
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Current Date/Time Settings>.
3
Enter the date and time.
● Use or to move the cursor, and enter the date and time using or .
Setting Up
9
4
Press .
● Set <Time Zone> befor
e setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed later, the
current date and time are also changed accordingly.
● The display format of the date and time can be changed, r
espectively.
<Date Format>(P. 227)
<Time Format>(P. 227)
Setting the Daylight Saving Time
If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates fr
om which and to which daylight saving time is in effect.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight Saving Time Settings>.
3
Select <Off> or <On> in <Daylight Saving Time>.
● When you select <On>, pr
oceed to step 4.
4
Set the month and day for the start date, and then select <Apply>.
● T
o set the day, specify "what day of which week."
5
Set the month and day for the end date, and then select <Apply>.
● T
o set the day, specify "what day of which week."
● This setting may be unavailable depending on the country or r
egion of purchase.
Setting Up
10
Setting Up the Network Environment
2JRY-006
When connecting the machine to a wir
ed or wireless local area network (LAN), you need to set an IP address unique to
the selected network. Select "wired" or "wireless" depending on your communication environment and networking
devices. For specic IP address settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
● If the machine is connected to an unsecur
ed network, your personal information might be leaked to a third
party.
● The machine cannot connect to both wir
ed and wireless LANs at the same time.
● The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.
● For more information about your networking devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact
your manufacturer.
◼ Befor
e You Start
Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.
Check your computer settings.
● Mak
e sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more
information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the
device manufacturers.
● Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the
network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the
network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.
● Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the communication
method or the Ethernet type (
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P
. 47) ). For more
information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
● To check the MAC address of the machine.
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 34)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 35)
Setting Up
11
● T
o connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see
Conguring IEEE 802.1X
Authentication Settings
(P. 189) .
Select wired or wireless LAN.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 13)
Connect to a wired or wireless LAN.
● Pr
oceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 14)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)
Set the IP address as necessary.
● At the time of pur
chase, the machine is set to automatically acquire an IP address.
Change this setting if you want to use a specic IP address.
Setting IP
Addr
esses(P. 27)
LINKS
Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer(P. 36)
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 46)
Setting Up
12
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN
2JRY-007
After you decide on wir
ed or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer, select wired LAN or wireless LAN
using the operation panel. Note that if you change the setting from <Wired LAN> to <Wireless LAN> or vice versa, you
will need to uninstall the drivers installed on your computer and then reinstall them. For more information, see the
manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Network Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <Select Wired/Wireless LAN>.
4
Select <Wired LAN> or <Wireless LAN>.
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 14)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)
Setting Up
13
Connecting to a Wired LAN
2JRY-008
Connect the machine to a computer via a r
outer. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.
1
Connect a LAN cable.
● Connect the machine to a r
outer by using a LAN cable.
● Push the connector in until it clicks into place.
2
Wait for several minutes.
➠ The IP addr
ess is set automatically.
● Y
ou can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 27)
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11)
Setting Up
14
Connecting to a Wireless LAN
2JRY-009
Wir
eless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer via radio waves. If your wireless router is
equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), conguring your network is automatic and easy. If your networking
devices do not support automatic conguration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in
detail, you need to manually set up the connection. Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the
network.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS(P. 15)
Manually Setting Up Connection(P. 16)
Risk of information leak
● Use wir
eless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an
unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in
wireless communication can go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.
Wireless LAN security
● The wireless LAN function of this machine supports WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK. For the wireless security
compatibility of your wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact
your manufacturer.
Required devices for wireless LAN connection
● The machine does not come with a wir
eless router. Have the router ready as necessary.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS
When using WPS, two modes ar
e available: push button mode and PIN code mode.
◼ Push Button Mode
Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router. Also make sure that there is a WPS button on
your networking device.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 17)
Setting Up
15
◼ PIN Code Mode
Some WPS r
outers do not support the push button mode. If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in
the instruction manuals of your networking device, set up the connection by entering the PIN code.
Setting Up
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P
. 19)
● If the wir
eless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.
Manually Setting Up Connection
When manually setting up a wir
eless connection, you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required
information. Regardless of the method, make sure that you have the required setup information, including the SSID
and network key.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 26)
◼ Selecting a Wir
eless Router
Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as
possible.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 21)
◼ Manually Entering the Setup Information
If you want to specify security settings in detail, such as authentication and encryption settings, manually enter the
SSID and network k
ey to set up the connection.
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23)
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11)
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 13)
Setting Up
16
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
2JRY-00A
If your wir
eless router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button.
● Ho
w to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your
networking device for help.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Network Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Enable the wir
eless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
● If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <WPS Push Button Mode>.
6
Select <Yes>.
7
Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.
● The button must be pr
essed within 2 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 6.
● Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer.
See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close> and r
eturn to step 5.
Setting Up
17
8
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
➠ W
ait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 27)
● While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
Reducing power consumption
● Y
ou can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 215)
If the IP addr
ess of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)
Setting Up
18
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode
2JRY-00C
If your wir
eless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to
the networking device.
● Ho
w to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your
networking device for help.
From a Computer
1
Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a
WPS PIN code.
● For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking device.
From the Operation Panel
2
Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 78)
3
Select <Network Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
4
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Enable the wir
eless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
● If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
5
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
6
Select <WPS PIN Code Mode>.
7
Select <Yes>.
➠ The PIN code is gener
ated and shown on the display.
From a Computer
8
Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router.
Setting Up
19
● Register the PIN code on the setup scr
een displayed in step 1.
● The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 7.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close> and r
eturn to step 6.
From the Operation Panel
9
Wait until the message <Connected.> is displayed.
➠ W
ait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When
more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● Y
ou can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 27)
● While
the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
Reducing power consumption
● Y
ou can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 215)
If the IP addr
ess of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)
Setting Up
20
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
2JRY-00E
Y
ou can search the wireless routers (or access points) available for connection and select one from the display of the
machine. For the network key, enter a WEP key or PSK. Before selecting a wireless router, check and write down the
required setup information, including the SSID and network key (
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 26) ).
Security settings
● If the wir
eless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to
<Open System> or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want to
select <Shared Key> for WEP authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2 encryption, you need to set up
the connection using <Enter Manually>.
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Network Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Enable the wir
eless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
● If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <SSID Settings>.
6
Select <Select Access Point>.
➠ The machine starts sear
ching for available wireless routers.
● If
a message is displayed telling that access point cannot be found, see
Countermeasures for Each
Message
(P. 297) .
7
Select a wireless LAN router.
● Select the r
outer whose SSID matches the one that you have written down, and press
.
Setting Up
21
If your wireless router is not found
● Check
whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/
Settings Pr
oblems(P. 275)
8
Enter the network key that you have written down.
● Enter the network k
ey, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 83) .
9
Select <Yes>.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close>, check whether the network k
ey is correct, and return to step 5.
10
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
➠ W
ait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When
more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● Y
ou can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 27)
● While
the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
Reducing power consumption
● You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 215)
If the IP addr
ess of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)
Setting Up
22
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
2JRY-00F
If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wir
eless connection using the other
procedures, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Before specifying detailed
settings, check and write down the required information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security
protocols.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 26)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Network Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
● If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <SSID Settings>
<Enter Manually>.
6
Enter the SSID that you have written down.
● Enter the SSID
, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 83) .
7
Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down.
● If you do not need to specify the security settings, select <None>.
Using WEP
1
Select <WEP>.
2
Select an authentication method.
Setting Up
23
<Open System>
Sets open system authentication, which is also called "
open authentication."
<Shared Key>
Uses the WEP key as a password.
When <Open System> is selected
● When connecting to a wir
eless LAN, the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key
authentication is set on the wireless router. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the
setting to <Shared Key> and retries the connection.
3
Select the WEP key you want to edit.
● Select <Edit WEP Key>
WEP key (1 to 4).
● Up to four WEP k
eys can be registered.
4
Enter the network key that you have written down.
● Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.
5
Select the desired WEP key.
● Select <Select WEP Key>
select the WEP key you have edited.
Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
1
Select <WPA/WPA2-PSK>.
2
Select an encryption method.
<Auto>
Sets the machine to automatically select AES-C
CMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router.
<AES-CCMP>
Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method.
3
Enter the network key that you have written down.
● Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.
8
Select <Yes>.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close>, check whether the specied settings ar
e correct, and return to step 5.
9
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
Setting Up
24
➠ W
ait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When
more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● Y
ou can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 27)
● While
the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
Reducing power consumption
● Y
ou can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 215)
If the IP addr
ess of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)
Setting Up
25
Checking the SSID and Network Key
2JRY-00H
When manually setting up a wir
eless connection, you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router.
The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking devices. Check your devices and write down the
necessary information before setting up the connection. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
SSID A name given for identifying a specic wir
eless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID include
"access point name" and "network name."
Network Key A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other
terms used for network key include "encryption key," "WEP key," "WPA/WPA2 passphrase,"
and "preshared key (PSK)."
Wireless Security Protocols
(Authentication/Encryption)
When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings, you need to
specify security settings. Check the following information:
● Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)
● Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key)
● Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
◼ Checking the SSID and Network Ke
y from a Computer
The SSID or the network key may have been changed. If you do not know the SSID or the network key, you can check
them by using the "Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant." Download the "Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant"
from the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/), and start it up from a computer connected to a wireless LAN.
● If no access point is displayed on the scr
een after startup of the "Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant,"
check if the setup is completed both on the computer and the wireless LAN router.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 21)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23)
Setting Up
26
Setting IP Addresses
2JRY-00J
Connecting the machine to a network r
equires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are
available: IPv4 and IPv6. Congure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you
need to properly congure the IPv4 address settings.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)
Setting Up
27
Setting IPv4 Address
2JRY-00K
The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP
addr
essing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the
machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are rmly
inserted into the ports (
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 14) ). Y
ou can test the
network connection if necessary.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)
Testing the Network Connection(P. 29)
Setting IPv4 Address
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Network Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Address Settings>.
4
Congure IP addr
ess settings.
<Auto Acquire>
Select to automatically assign an IP addr
ess via DHCP protocol. When <On> is displayed, automatic
addressing is enabled.
<Manually Acquire>
Select to congure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this option,
the automatic acquirement must be set to <Off>.
<Check Settings>
Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.
Automatically assigning an IP address
1
Select <Auto Acquire>.
2
Select the protocol.
● Select <Select Pr
otocol>
<DHCP>.
If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address
Setting Up
28
● Select <Off>. If you select <DHCP> when these services ar
e unavailable, the machine will waste time
and communications resources searching the network for these services.
3
Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.
● If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.
4
Select <Apply>.
● IP addr
esses assigned via DHCP override the address obtained via Auto IP.
Manually entering an IP address
1
Congure a setting to disable auto-acquisition.
● Select <Auto Acquir
e>, and set both <Select Protocol> and <Auto IP> to <Off>.
2
Select <Manually Acquire>.
3
Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (or default gateway).
● Enter these values in each screen, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 83) .
Checking whether the settings are correct
● Mak
e sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer (
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198) ). If a computer is not available, you can check the connection by using the operation panel (
Testing the Network Connection(P. 29) ).
When you have changed the IP addr
ess after installing the printer driver
● When the MFNP port is used, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong
to the same subnet; therefore, you do not need to add a new port. When the standard TCP/IP port is used,
you need to add a new port.
Conguring Printer Ports
(P. 39)
*
If you do not know which port is used, see
Checking the Printer Port(P. 345) .
Testing the Network Connection
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Network Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <PING Command>.
4
Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and select <Apply>.
➠ If a pr
oper connection has been established, <Received response from host.> is displayed.
Setting Up
29
LINKS
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)
Setting Up
30
Setting IPv6 Addresses
2JRY-00L
The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be congur
ed via the Remote UI. Before
setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings (
Viewing IPv4
Settings(P
. 34) ). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses.
Note that the scan function that uses the scanner driver or MF Scan Utility is not
available in an IPv6 environment. The machine can use the following multiple IPv6
addresses:
Type Description
Link-local address An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with
de
vices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the
machine is enabled.
Manual address An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prex length and default
router address.
Stateless address An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the network
prex that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are discarded when the machine is
restarted (or turned ON).
Stateful address An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
4
Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
5
Select the [Use IPv6] check box and congur
e the required settings.
Setting Up
31
[Use IPv6]
Select the check bo
x to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.
[Use Stateless Address]
Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.
[Use Manual Address]
When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prex
length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.
[IP Address]
Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) and the loopback address (::1)
cannot be entered.
[Prex Length]
Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.
[Default Router Address]
Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) and the loopback address (::1) cannot be entered.
[Use DHCPv6]
Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.
6
Click [OK].
Checking whether the settings are correct
● Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the
machine. Starting Remote UI(P. 198)
Selecting settings fr
om the operation panel
● IPv6 settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<IPv6 Settings>(P. 218)
Setting Up
32
When you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
● Y
ou need to add a new port.
Conguring Printer Ports(P
. 39)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)
Setting Up
33
Viewing Network Settings
2JRY-00R
Viewing IPv4 Settings(P. 34)
Viewing IPv6 Settings(P. 34)
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 34)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 35)
● The IP addr
ess is not correctly congured if it is displayed as "0.0.0.0".
● Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP
address is correctly congured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine
starts communicating.
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 50)
● Y
ou can print a list of the current network settings.
User Data List(P. 266)
Viewing IPv4 Settings
<Status Monitor> <Network Information> <IPv4> Select the setting to view Check the
settings
Viewing IPv6 Settings
<Status Monitor> <Network Information> <IPv6> Select the setting to view Check the
settings
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Network Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.
➠ MA
C address is displayed.
Setting Up
34
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Network Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <Wireless LAN Information>.
6
Select the setting to view.
Viewing security information
● T
o view WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK information, use the following procedure.
<Security Settings>
Select the displayed security protocol Select the setting to view
Vie
wing from the <Status Monitor> screen
● <Wireless LAN Status> and <Latest Error Information> can be viewed from <Status Monitor>.
<Status Monitor>
<Network Information> <Network Connection Method> <Connection
Information> Select the setting to view
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)
Conguring DNS(P
. 51)
Setting Up
35
Conguring Settings for Communication with a
Computer
2JRY-00S
Specify the pr
otocol and port when operating the machine from a computer via the network. Before conguring the
machine for printing from a computer, perform the basic setup procedures. For more information, see the manuals
for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD Functions(P. 37)
Conguring Printer Ports(P
. 39)
Setting Up Print Server(P. 43)
● Pr
otocols explained here are rules for delivering document data between a computer and the machine, and
can be selected according to intended purposes or the network environment.
● Ports are gateways for passing data between network devices. If a communication failure occurs in the
network connection, the port settings may be the cause of the problem.
Setting Up
36
Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD Functions
2JRY-00U
Congur
e the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer.
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
4
Congure printing pr
otocols.
Conguring LPD or RAW
1
Click [Edit] in [LPD Print Settings] or [RAW Print Settings].
2
Congure the settings as necessary
.
[Use LPD Printing]
Select the check bo
x to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.
[Use RAW Printing]
Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.
3
Click [OK].
Conguring WSD
1
Click [Edit] in [WSD Settings].
2
Congure the settings as necessary
.
Setting Up
37
[Use WSD Printing]
Select the check bo
x to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.
[Use WSD Browsing]
Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is
automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.
[Use WSD Scanning]
WSD scanning enables you to scan documents to a computer without installing the scanner driver. Select
the check box to scan documents via WSD. When not using WSD scanning, clear the check box.
[Use Computer Scanning]
Select the check box to use WSD scanning by operating the machine with the operation panel. This check
box can only be selected when the [Use WSD Scanning] check box is selected. To perform scanning, select
<Scan> in the Home screen and specify a WSD-connected computer as a scan destination (
Scanning
and Saving to a Computer(P
. 128) ).
[Use Multicast Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is
cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are owing on the
network.
3
Click [OK].
Selecting settings from the operation panel
● LPD
, RAW, and WSD settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<LPD Print Settings>(P. 219)
<RAW Print Settings>(P. 219)
<WSD Settings>(P. 219)
Setting up WSD network de
vices
● The WSD network devices can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder (
Displaying the
Printer Folder(P
. 341) )
click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions. For
mor
e information about how to install the driver for the WSD network, see the manuals for the relevant
drivers on the online manual website.
To change the port number
● The same port number used for the machine and a computer must be used for printing protocol.
Conguring Printer Ports(P
. 39)
Changing Port Numbers(P. 176)
LINKS
Conguring Printer Ports(P
. 39)
Setting Up
38
Conguring Printer Ports
2JRY-00W
Printing err
ors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via
the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an
incorrect port number or port type may have been specied. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the
document data cannot reach the machine. To x this type of problem, congure the printer port settings on the
computer.
● T
o perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
1
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 341)
2
Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Pr
operties].
3
Click the [Ports] tab and congur
e the required settings.
Adding a port
If you have changed the IP addr
ess of the machine or you have selected an incorrect port while installing
drivers from the Windows printer folder, add a new port. There are two types of port: "MFNP Port" and
"Standard TCP/IP Port." Select the port type according to your environment.
MFNP Port
(only for IPv4 envir
onment)
This is a port that allows the IP address of the machine to be detected automatically.
Even if the IP addr
ess of the machine is changed, the connection is maintained,
provided that the machine and the computer are in the same subnet. You do not need
to add a new port every time the IP address is changed. If you are using the machine
in an IPv4 environment, you should normally select this type of port.
● Y
ou can add an MFNP port only when you installed the driver from the provided
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM, or when you downloaded and installed the printer driver from
the Canon website.
Setting Up
39
Standard TCP/IP Port This is a standard Windows port. When you use this type of port, you need to add a
ne
w port every time that the IP address of the machine is changed. Select this type of
port when you are using the machine in an IPv6 environment and when you cannot
add an MFNP port.
Adding an MFNP port
1
Click [Add Port].
2
Select [Canon MFNP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3
Select [Auto Detect] and select the machine when it is detected, and then click [Next].
If the machine is not detected
● Click [Refr
esh]. If the problem persists, select [IP address] or [MAC address], enter the IP address or
MAC address of the machine (
Viewing Network Settings(P. 34) ) and then click [Ne
xt].
4
Click [Add]
[Finish].
5
Click [Close].
Adding a standard TCP/IP port
1
Click [Add Port].
2
Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3
Click [Next].
4
Enter the IP address or the DNS name of the machine, and click [Next].
● The [Port Name] is enter
ed automatically. If necessary, you can change it.
Setting Up
40
● When the ne
xt screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the screen.
*
When you select the [De
vice Type], select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] under [Standard].
5
Click [Finish].
6
Click [Close].
Changing the port type or number
If the printing pr
otocol (LPD or RAW) has been changed on the machine side (
Conguring Printing
Pr
otocols and WSD Functions(P. 37) ) or the port number has been changed (
Changing Port
Numbers(P
. 176) ), the corresponding settings on the computer must also be congured. This operation is
not needed for WSD ports.
MFNP port
1
Click [Congure Port].
2
Under [Protocol Type], select [RAW] or [LPR], and change the [Port Number].
3
Click [OK].
Standard TCP/IP port
1
Click [Congur
e Port].
2
Under [Protocol], select [Raw] or [LPR].
Setting Up
41
● If you selected [Raw], change the [Port Number].
● If you selected [LPR], enter "lp
" in [Queue Name].
3
Click [OK].
4
Click [Close].
LINKS
Setting Up Print Server(P. 43)
Setting Up
42
Setting Up Print Server
2JRY-00X
With a print server, you can r
educe the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also makes it
possible to install the drivers on each computer over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers
on each computer by using the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server,
congure the settings for sharing the printer.
● T
o perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
● You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit
architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.
● When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.
1
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 341)
2
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or
[Pr
operties].
3
Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the
machine.
● Click the [Change Sharing Options] button if displayed.
4
Install additional drivers as necessary.
● This oper
ation is required if you want to install the drivers in other computers running a different bit
architecture via the print server.
1
Click [Additional Drivers].
2
Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].
Setting Up
43
● Select additional drivers fr
om the following, according to the operating system of the print server.
Print server Select the check box for
32-bit operating systems [x64]
64-bit operating systems [x86] under [Processor]
● If you do not kno
w whether your Windows operating system is a 32-bit or 64-bit version, see
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 344) .
3
Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder
that contains the drivers, and then click [OK].
● If the print server runs a 32-bit oper
ating system, select [intdrv]
[UFRII] [uk_eng] [x64]
[Driver] folders on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
● If the print server runs a 64-bit oper
ating system, select [intdrv]
[UFRII] [uk_eng] [32BIT]
[Driver] folders on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
4
Follow the on-screen instructions to install additional drivers.
5
Click [OK].
◼ Installing the Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server
1
Locate the shared printer in the print server.
Displaying Shared Printers in the
Print Server(P
. 342)
2
Double-click the shared printer.
3
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.
LINKS
Setting Up
44
Printing from a Computer(P. 119)
Setting Up
45
Conguring the Machine for Y
our Network
Environment
2JRY-00Y
The congur
ation of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. The machine has been designed to
be compatible with as many network congurations as possible, and it is equipped with a variety of technologies.
Consult your Network Administrator and set a conguration to suit your network environment.
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P
. 47)
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 49)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 50)
Conguring DNS(P
. 51)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 54)
Conguring SNTP
(P. 58)
Setting Up
46
Conguring Ethernet Settings
2JRY-010
Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can
set the communication mode and the Ethernet type. In gener
al, the machine can be
used without changing the defaults (
<Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 222) ), but
you can change these settings to suit your network envir
onment.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Network Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>
<Auto Detect>.
4
Select whether to congur
e Ethernet settings automatically or manually.
● If auto-detection is enabled, the machine detects and automatically sets the Ethernet communication mode
and the type that can be used.
Conguring Ethernet settings automatically
Select <On>.
Conguring Ethernet settings manually
1
Select <Off>.
2
<Communication Mode>
select the communication mode.
<Half Duplex>
Alternately sends and r
eceives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a
networking device using half duplex.
<Full Duplex>
Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.
3
<Ethernet Type>
select the Ethernet type.
Setting Up
47
4
Select <Apply>.
LINKS
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 49)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 50)
Setting Up
48
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
2JRY-011
In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a pack
et that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of
data into which the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each
network. Change the settings of the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Network Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings> <MTU Size>.
4
Select the MTU.
LINKS
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P
. 47)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 50)
Setting Up
49
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
2JRY-012
When a network is designed to enjo
y redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a
mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to dene the role of each switch port. However,
communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network
devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the
network.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Network Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>.
4
Enter the waiting time required to start a communication with the network, and
pr
ess
.
LINKS
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P
. 47)
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 49)
Setting Up
50
Conguring DNS
2JRY-013
DNS (Domain Name System) pr
ovides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP
address. Congure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for conguring
DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
4
Congure DNS settings.
Conguring IPv4 DNS
1
Click [Edit] in [IPv4 Settings].
2
Congure IPv4 DNS settings.
Setting Up
51
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Addr
ess]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. When specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS
Dynamic Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted b
y Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the
[mDNS Name] text box.
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquir
e Host Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP
server.
3
Click [OK].
Conguring IPv6 DNS
1
Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
2
Congure IPv6 DNS settings.
● The [Use IPv6] check bo
x must be selected to congure the settings.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)
Setting Up
52
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Addr
ess]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be
entered.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) cannot be entered.
[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the
check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless
Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic
Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted b
y Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.
[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the
check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.
3
Click [OK].
Selecting settings from the operation panel
● DNS settings can also be accessed fr
om <Menu> in the Home screen.
<IPv4 Settings>(P. 217)
<IPv6 Settings>(P. 218)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)
Setting Up
53
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
2JRY-014
Simple Network Management Pr
otocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a
network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced
SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.
You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your
network environment and the purpose of use.
SNMPv1
SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to dene the scope of SNMP communication. Because this
information is e
xposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to
ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.
SNMPv3
With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.
Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI befor
e conguring SNMPv3 (
Conguring the Ke
y and
Certicate for TLS(P. 179) ).
● The machine does not support the tr
ap notication feature of SNMP.
● To change the port number of SNMP, see
Changing Port Numbers(P. 176) .
● SNMP management softwar
e, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to congure,
monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction
manuals for your management software.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
Setting Up
54
5
Specify SNMPv1 settings.
● If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, pr
oceed to the next step.
[Use SNMPv1]
Select the check bo
x to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]
Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear
the check box.
[Community Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.
[MIB Access Permission]
For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Use Dedicated Community]
Dedicated Community is a pr
eset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software.
Select the check box to use Dedicated Community, and specify [MIB Access Permission]. If you do not need to
use Dedicated Community, clear the check box.
6
Specify SNMPv3 settings.
● If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, pr
oceed to the next step.
Setting Up
55
[Use SNMPv3]
Select the check bo
x to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Enable User]
Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings,
clear the corresponding check box.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[MIB Access Permission]
Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Security Settings]
Select [Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication Off/
Encryption Off] for the desir
ed combination of authentication and encryption settings.
[Authentication Algorithm]
Click the [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] for [Security Settings] for
the algorithm that corresponds to your environment.
[Encryption Algorithm]
Click the [Authentication On/Encryption On] for [Security Settings] for the algorithm that corresponds to your
environment.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in
the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password
in the [Conrm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and encryption algorithms.
[Context Name 1]/[Context Name 2]/[Context Name 3]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the context name. Up to three context names can be registered.
7
Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.
Setting Up
56
● With SNMP
, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be
monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.
[Acquire Printer Management Information from Host]
Select the check bo
x to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.
To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.
8
Click [OK].
Disabling SNMPv1
● If SNMPv1 is disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine
information via the printer driver.
Using the oper
ation panel
● You can also specify SNMPv1 settings and enable/disable SNMPv3 settings from <Menu>.
<SNMP
Settings>(P
. 220)
Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3
● If both versions of SNMP ar
e enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to
[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in
SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features
that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.
LINKS
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 179)
Setting Up
57
Conguring SNTP
2JRY-015
Simple Network Time Pr
otocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using the time server on the network.
If SNTP is used, the time server is checked at the specied intervals; therefore, the correct time can always be
maintained. The time is adjusted based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), so specify the time zone setting before
conguring SNTP (
Setting the Date/Time(P. 9) ). SNTP settings can be specied via the Remote UI.
● The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
4
Click [Edit] in [SNTP Settings].
5
Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use SNTP]
Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.
[NTP Server Name]
Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host
name (or FQDN) consisting of alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).
[Polling Interval]
Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next.
6
Click [OK].
Setting Up
58
Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server
● Y
ou can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration]
[Network
Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings]. If a proper connection has been
established, the r
esult is displayed as shown below. Note that this operation does not adjust the system
clock.
Setting Up
59
Installing Drivers
2JRY-016
Install the various drivers and associated softwar
e on your computer.
1
Make the necessary preparation before proceeding with the installation.
● If the machine is supplied with a CD-ROM/D
VD-ROM, insert the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the
computer.
● You can download drivers and software you are going to use from the Canon website (http://
www.canon.com/).
● When
new versions of drivers and software become available, they will be uploaded to the Canon website.
You can download them as necessary after checking their system requirements.
● Depending on your machine or environmental conditions, some functions may not be available.
● Some of the drivers are not supported depending on the OS. For more information about the supported
status of the latest OS, see the Canon website.
2
Proceed with the installation.
● For mor
e information about the installation procedure, see the manuals for the drivers and software you are
going to use.
● Installation of drivers is impossible if r
eceiving of the IP address are not permitted in [IP Address Filter]. For
more information, see
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 171) .
● If r
eceiving of the IP address of the computer on which drivers are installed become disabled by [IP Address
Filter], it is no longer possible to perform printing from that computer.
Setting Up
60
Conguring Scan Settings
2JRY-017
T
o save scanned originals to a computer, you need to complete preparations in advance, including installation of
software to a computer. Set the necessary conguration depending on your network environment.
Saving to a Computer
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 62)
LINKS
System Environment(P. 333)
Scan Function(P. 330)
Setting Up
61
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner
2JRY-018
T
o use this machine as a scanner, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of software to a
computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website. In Windows,
when connecting this machine to a computer via a wireless or wired LAN, you need to register this machine in "MF
Network Scanner Selector" using the following procedure. This procedure is not required if the machine and your
computer are connected via USB.
● The scan function is not available if the machine and your computer ar
e connected in an IPv6 environment.
Use IPv4 or a USB connection.
1
Click
in the system tray.
2
Select the check box for the machine, and click [OK].
Setting Up
62
Basic Operations
Basic Operations ...............................................................................................................................................
64
Parts and Their Functions ................................................................................................................................... 67
Front Side ....................................................................................................................................................... 68
Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 70
Drawer ............................................................................................................................................................ 71
Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 72
Turning ON the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 74
Turning OFF the Machine ............................................................................................................................... 75
Using the Operation Panel .................................................................................................................................. 76
Basic Screens .................................................................................................................................................. 77
Home Screen ........................................................................................................................................... 78
<Status Monitor> Screen .......................................................................................................................... 79
Message Display ...................................................................................................................................... 80
Basic Operation .............................................................................................................................................. 81
Entering Text .................................................................................................................................................. 83
Placing Originals ................................................................................................................................................. 84
Loading Paper ...................................................................................................................................................... 86
Loading Paper in the Drawer .......................................................................................................................... 88
Loading Envelopes .......................................................................................................................................... 92
Loading Preprinted Paper ............................................................................................................................... 94
Specifying Paper Size and Type ....................................................................................................................... 95
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer ......................................................................................... 96
Registering a Custom Paper Size ............................................................................................................. 97
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed .......................................................................................................... 98
Customizing the Display ..................................................................................................................................... 99
Customizing the Home Screen ..................................................................................................................... 100
Changing the Default Settings for Functions .................................................................................................. 101
Entering Sleep Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 102
Basic Operations
63
Basic Operations
2JRY-019
This chapter describes basic oper
ations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper, that are
frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.
◼ Parts and Their Functions
This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys
on the operation panel and how to view the display.
Parts and Their Functions(P. 67)
◼ T
urning ON the Machine
This section describes how to turn the machine ON and OFF.
Turning ON the Machine(P. 74)
◼ Using the Oper
ation Panel
This section describes how to use the display for tasks such as selecting items and adjusting settings. Also, it describes
how to enter characters and numbers.
Using the Operation Panel(P. 76)
◼ Placing Originals
This section describes ho
w to place originals on the platen glass.
Placing Originals(P. 84)
Basic Operations
64
◼ Loading Paper
This section describes ho
w to load the paper into the drawer.
Loading Paper(P. 86)
◼ Customizing the Display
This section describes ho
w to rearrange Home screen menu items.
Customizing the Display(P. 99)
◼ Changing the Default Settings for Functions
This section describes ho
w to change the setting that is displayed initially when a function is selected.
Changing the
Default Settings for Functions
(P. 101)
◼ Entering Sleep Mode
This section describes ho
w to set the sleep mode.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 102)
Basic Operations
65
Basic Operations
66
Parts and Their Functions
2JRY-01A
This section describes the parts of the machine (e
xterior, front side and back side) and how they function. In addition
to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as loading paper and replacing the toner
cartridges, etc., this section also describes the keys on the operation panel. Read this section for tips on how to use the
machine properly.
Front Side(P. 68)
Back Side(P. 70)
Drawer(P. 71)
Operation Panel(P. 72)
Basic Operations
67
Front Side
2JRY-01C
Platen glass cover
Open to place originals on the platen glass. Placing Originals(P. 84)
Operation panel
The oper
ation panel consists of keys such as the Home key, Stop key, a display, and status indicators. You can
perform all the operations and specify settings from the operation panel.
Operation Panel(P. 72)
Basic Screens(P. 77)
Power indicator
Lights up when the po
wer is turned ON.
Power switch
T
urns the power ON or OFF. To restart the machine, turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and
turn it back ON.
Drawer
Load the paper to print in this tr
ay.
Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 88)
Toner cover
Open the toner co
ver when replacing toner cartridges or drum cartridges.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 256)
Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 259)
Ventilation slots
Air fr
om inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects
on the ventilation slots prevents ventilation.
Basic Operations
68
Platen glass
When scanning originals, place them on the platen glass. Placing Originals(P. 84)
Output tray
Printed paper is output to the output tr
ay.
Paper stopper
Open the paper stopper when you want to pr
event paper from falling out of the output tray.
Basic Operations
69
Back Side
2JRY-01E
Rating label
The label sho
ws the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine.
When a
Pr
oblem Cannot Be Solved(P. 313)
USB port
Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer.
LAN port
Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router, etc. Connecting to a Wired
LAN(P
. 14)
Power socket
Connect the po
wer cord.
Basic Operations
70
Drawer
2JRY-01F
Paper cover
Remo
ve this cover to load paper in the drawer.
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to e
xactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 88)
Basic Operations
71
Operation Panel
2JRY-01H
Home key
Pr
ess to display the Home screen, which provides access to the setting menu and functions such as copy and
scan.
Home Screen(P. 78)
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 100)
Display (screen)
Y
ou can view the operation and error statuses of this machine, the amount remaining in the toner cartridges,
etc.
Basic Screens(P. 77)
Basic Operation(P. 81)
Reset key
Pr
ess to cancel the settings and restore the previously specied settings.
[ ] key
● When specifying settings, pr
ess to return to the previous screen.
● When entering text, press to select the item you want to use.
● Press to decrease a setting value such as the contrast of the display.
[ ] key
● When specifying settings, pr
ess to select the item immediately above the currently selected item.
● When changing setting values, press to increase a value.
[ ] key
● When specifying settings, pr
ess to proceed to the next screen.
● When entering text, press to select the item you want to use.
● Press to increase a setting value such as the contrast of the display.
Basic Operations
72
[ ] key
● When specifying settings, pr
ess to select the item immediately below the currently selected item.
● When changing setting values, press to decrease a value.
Stop key
Pr
ess to cancel printing and other operations.
Start key
Pr
ess to scan or copy originals.
[ ] key
Pr
ess to apply settings or specied details.
Back key
Pr
ess to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the
settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.
Error indicator
Blinks or lights up when an err
or such as a paper jam occurs.
Data indicator
Blinks while oper
ations such as sending or printing are being performed. Lights up when there are
documents waiting to be processed.
ID Card Copy key
Pr
ess to enter a mode for copying the front and back sides of a driver's license or other ID card onto the
same side of a page at actual size.
Making ID Card Copies(P. 116)
LINKS
Basic Operation(P. 81)
Basic Operations
73
Turning ON the Machine
2JRY-01J
This section describes ho
w to turn ON the machine.
1
Make sure that the power plug is rmly inserted into a po
wer outlet.
2
Press the power switch.
➠ The po
wer indicator lights and the machine is ready for printing.
NOTE
● Y
ou can select the screen that is displayed rst after the machine is turned ON.
<Default Screen
after Startup/Restor
ation>(P. 223)
● A blank sheet of paper may be output when you turn ON the power for the rst time after purchasing
the machine. This is not a malfunction.
LINKS
Turning OFF the Machine(P. 75)
Basic Operations
74
Turning OFF the Machine
2JRY-01K
This section describes ho
w to turn OFF the machine.
1
Press the power switch.
● Mak
e sure that the power indicator has gone out.
● It may tak
e some time for the machine to completely shut down. Do not unplug the power cord until the
display turns off.
● To restart the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds after the machine is turned OFF.
● Even when the power is turned OFF, the machine continues to consume a small amount of power. To reduce
power consumption to zero, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
Basic Operations
75
Using the Operation Panel
2JRY-01L
Y
ou can use the display and keys of the operation panel to congure machine settings or operate functions. This
section describes basic usage of the display and keys.
Basic Screens(P. 77)
Basic Operation(P. 81)
Entering Text(P. 83)
● If you want to invert the light and dark parts of the display: <Invert Screen Colors>(P. 224)
● If you want to adjust the contr
ast of the display:
<Contrast>(P. 223)
LINKS
Operation Panel(P. 72)
Basic Operations
76
Basic Screens
2JRY-01R
The Home scr
een or settings screen appears on the display, allowing you to initiate functions such as copy and scan.
You can also use the display to check information such as error messages and the machine's operation status.
Home Screen(P. 78)
<Status Monitor> Screen(P. 79)
Message Display(P. 80)
Basic Operations
77
Home Screen
2JRY-01S
The Home scr
een is displayed when the power is turned ON or by pressing
on the operation panel. Use this screen
to specify settings for and r
egister functions.
Wi-Fi icon
Displayed when the machine is connected to a wir
eless LAN.
<Cop
y>
Use this item to start copying.
Copying(P. 104)
<Scan>
Scans an original and converts it into an electr
onic le.
Scanning(P. 126)
<Paper Settings>
This item is used for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in the
dr
awer.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 95)
<Status Monitor>
Select this item to check the printing status, to vie
w the usage history, or
to view the network settings such as the IP address of the machine. You
can also check the status of the machine, such as the amount remaining in
the toner cartridge, etc., or whether any errors occurred.
<Status
Monitor> Scr
een(P. 79)
<Dir
ect Connection>
Select this item to connect the mobile device and the machine directly
without using a wireless LAN router.
Connecting Directly (Access Point
Mode)
(P. 142)
<Menu>
<Network Settings>, <Pr
eferences>, and many other machine settings
start from this item.
Setting Menu List(P. 213)
<Display Order (Home)>
Allo
ws you to change the order that Home screen items are displayed in.
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 100)
LINKS
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 100)
Basic Operations
78
<Status Monitor> Screen
2JRY-01U
When you select <Status Monitor>, a scr
een appears in which you can check the progress of document processing as
well as the status of the machine (the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges, etc.) and network settings
such as the machine's IP address.
<Device Information>
Displays the status of the machine, such as the amount r
emaining in the toner cartridges, etc.
<Paper Information>
Displays the paper size specied in the dr
awer.
<Cartridge Level>
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge. Other internal parts may
reach the end of their lifetime before the amount remaining in the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge
reaches its lifetime.
<Check Counter>
Displays the total for printouts.
Viewing the Counter Value(P. 265)
<V
ersion Information>
Displays rmware version information.
<Serial Number>
Displays the serial number.
<Copy/Print Job>
Displays the current copy/print statuses and the logs for printed documents. Checking the Printing
Status and Log(P
. 123)
<Network Information>
Displays the network settings such as the IP addr
ess of the machine and status such as the condition of
wireless LAN communications.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)
Basic Operations
79
Message Display
2JRY-01W
Messages ar
e displayed on the screen in situations such as when paper runs out or when the expiration of the toner
cartridge lifetime is reached.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 297)
When an Error Occurs
In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the on-
scr
een instructions to solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an
example.
Basic Operations
80
Basic Operation
2JRY-01X
Use the k
eys shown below to specify settings and adjust values.
Using /
Scrolling the Screen
The scr
oll bar is displayed on the right side of the screen when not all of the information ts on one screen. If
the scroll bar is displayed, use
/ to scroll up or down. The text and background colors of an item are
inverted when it is selected.
Changing Setting Values
Use / to enter values.
● V
alues in ( ) displayed below the entry box are the enterable value range.
● You can also use
/ to select the item you want to use when entering text. Entering Text(P. 83)
Using /
Proceeding to the Next Screen/Returning to the Previous Screen
Pr
ess
to proceed to the next screen. Press to return to the previous screen.
● Y
ou can also proceed to the next screen by pressing
, and return to the previous screen by pressing
the Back k
ey.
Changing Setting Values
Use / to adjust the slider scale.
Basic Operations
81
Moving the Cursor
Use
/ to enter values.
● When entering te
xt, use <
> / < > on the display to move the cursor. Entering Text(P. 83)
Using
Press to apply a setting.
● Y
ou can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the scrolling speed or the display language:
<Display Settings>(P. 223)
Basic Operations
82
Entering Text
2JRY-01Y
Use the k
eys shown on the display to enter text and values. Select a character or number you want, and press
.
Selecting the Type of Text
Select <Switch Entry Mode> and press to display the screen for selecting the type of text that is entered.
Select the type of te
xt and press
.
Deleting Text
Select < > on the screen, and press to delete the character you entered.
● When < > and < > do not appear on the screen, you can select < > on the screen and press
to delete all of the characters you entered.
Entering a Space
Select <Space> and press to enter a space.
● When the cursor is located at the last character, selecting < > and pressing allows a space to be
entered.
Moving the Cursor
Select < > or < > on the screen, and press to move the cursor.
Basic Operations
83
Placing Originals
2JRY-020
Place originals on the platen glass. For information on loadable sizes, etc., see Main Unit(P. 325) .
Use originals that are completely dry
● When placing originals, mak
e sure that any glue, ink, or correction uid on the originals has completely
dried.
1
Open the platen glass cover.
2
Place the original face down on the platen glass.
● Align the corner of the original with the top-left corner of the platen glass.
● T
o scan transparent originals (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), cover them with plain white
paper.
3
Gently close the platen glass cover.
➠ The machine is r
eady to scan the original.
Basic Operations
84
When scanning is complete
● Remo
ve the original from the platen glass.
Basic Operations
85
Loading Paper
2JRY-021
Y
ou can load the paper into the drawer. See
Available Paper(P. 328) for available paper sizes and types.
About Paper
Precautions for Paper(P. 86)
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine(P. 87)
Ho
w to Load Paper
Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 88)
Loading Envelopes(P. 92)
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 94)
Conguring the Settings for the Loaded Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 95)
Precautions for Paper
Do not use the following types of paper:
● A paper jam or printing err
or may occur.
- Wrinkled or creased paper
- Curled or rolled paper
- Torn paper
- Damp paper
- Very thin paper
- Thin coarse paper
- Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Back side of paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Highly textured paper
- Glossy paper
Notes on use of paper
● Only use paper that has fully acclimatized to the environment in which the machine is installed. Using paper
that has been stored under different temperature or humidity conditions may cause paper jams or result in
poor print quality.
Paper handling and storage
● It is recommended that you use paper as soon as possible after unwrapping. Paper remaining unused
should be covered with the original wrapping paper and stored on a at surface.
Basic Operations
86
● Keep the paper wr
apped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.
● Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.
● Do not store the paper vertically or do not stack too much paper.
● Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic changes
in temperature or humidity.
When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture
● Steam may emit fr
om the paper output area, or water droplets may form around the paper output area.
There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from xing
toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room
temperatures).
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine
When handling/storing the paper printed with the machine, tak
e the following precautions.
◼ How to Store the Printed Paper
● Store on a at surface.
● Do not store together with articles made of PVC (polyvinyl chloride) such as clear folders. Toner may melt, resulting
in the paper's sticking to PVC articles.
● Take care that the paper does not get folded or creased. Toner may peel off.
● To store over a long period of time (two years or longer), store in binders or equivalent.
● When the paper is stored over a long period of time, it may become discolored and thus the print may seem to have
undergone a change of color.
● Do not store in a place where the temperature is high.
◼ Precautions When Applying Adhesive
● Always use insoluble adhesive.
● Before applying adhesive, perform a test using a printout no longer required.
● When putting adhesive-applied paper sheets one over another, make sure that the adhesive is completely dried out.
LINKS
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 97)
Basic Operations
87
Loading Paper in the Drawer
2JRY-022
Load the paper into the dr
awer.
Always load paper in portrait orientation
● Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation. Be sur
e to load paper in portrait orientation, as shown in
the illustration below.
1
Open the drawer.
When replenishing paper
When the dr
awer is already opened and the paper cover is covered, remove the paper cover.
2
Spread the paper guides apart.
● Slide the paper guides outwar
d.
Basic Operations
88
3
Load the paper and slide it all the way in, until it touches the back side.
● Load the paper in portr
ait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine) and the print side face up.
Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation.
● Before loading it, fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.
● When you insert the paper with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen is
displayed.
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 224)
Keep the paper stack within the load limit guides
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit guides ( ). Loading too much paper may
cause paper jams.
When loading envelopes or preprinted paper, see Loading Envelopes(P. 92) or Loading Preprinted
Paper(P
. 94) .
4
Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
● Align the paper guides secur
ely against the edges of the paper.
Basic Operations
89
Align the paper guides securely against the paper
Paper guides that ar
e too loose or too tight may cause misfeeds or paper jams.
5
Replace the paper cover.
● When performing printing, open the paper stopper in advance so that the output paper does not fall out of
the output tr
ay.
»
Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer(P. 96)
When changing the paper size or type
● The
factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Plain>, respectively. If you load a
different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change
the settings, the machine cannot print properly.
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
● Y
ou can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
drawer, with the side to print face up (previously printed side face down).
- Load only one sheet of paper each time you print.
Basic Operations
90
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
-
You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
LINKS
Available Paper(P. 328)
Basic Operations
91
Loading Envelopes
2JRY-023
Mak
e sure to atten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes
and which side is face up.
Before Loading Envelopes(P. 92)
Loading Envelopes in the Drawer(P. 93)
● This section describes ho
w to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you
need to complete before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading
envelopes in the drawer, see
Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 88) .
Before Loading Envelopes
Follo
w the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.
1
Close the ap of each envelope.
2
Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed
tightly
.
3
Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and atten any curls.
4
Align the edges of the envelopes on a at surface.
Basic Operations
92
Loading Envelopes in the Drawer
Load the envelopes Monarch, No. 10 (COM10), DL, or C5 in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the
machine), with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
● Load the envelopes so that the edge with the ap is to
ward the left side as shown in the illustration.
Basic Operations
93
Loading Preprinted Paper
2JRY-024
When you use paper that has been pr
eprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading.
Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.
Making Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 94)
● This section mainly describes ho
w to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For a
description of the general procedure for loading paper in the drawer, see
Loading Paper in the
Dr
awer(P. 88) .
Making Printouts on Paper with Logos
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portr
ait Orientation
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
Basic Operations
94
Specifying Paper Size and Type
2JRY-025
Y
ou must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper
settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper.
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer(P. 96)
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 97)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 98)
● If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing err
or may occur.
Basic Operations
95
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer
2JRY-026
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Drawer 1>.
3
Select the paper size.
● If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.
4
Select the paper type.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 88)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 98)
Available Paper(P. 328)
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 224)
Basic Operations
96
Registering a Custom Paper Size
2JRY-027
Y
ou can register one frequently used custom paper size.
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Drawer 1> <Custom>
3
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
● Ex
ecute the following steps in sequence: <X>
enter the length of the <X> side using /
<Y> enter the length of the <Y> side
4
Select <Apply>.
5
Select the paper type.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 88)
Basic Operations
97
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed
2JRY-028
Y
ou can ensure that only frequently used paper sizes are shown in the <Frequently Used Sizes> screen for selecting
the paper size setting.
1
Select <Paper Settings> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>.
3
Clear the check boxes for paper sizes you do not want displayed.
● Ensure that only the check boxes for frequently used paper sizes are selected.
● Paper sizes that are not selected can be viewed by selecting <Other Sizes> in the paper size setting
selection screen.
4
Select <Apply>.
LINKS
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer(P. 96)
Basic Operations
98
Customizing the Display
2JRY-029
In or
der to make the Home screen easier to use, you can customize it.
Customizing the Home Screen
You can rearrange the items that are displayed in the Home screen. Customizing the Home Screen(P. 100)
Basic Operations
99
Customizing the Home Screen
2JRY-02A
T
o make the Home screen easier to use, you can freely change the item display order.
1
Select <Display Order (Home)> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Use
/ to select the item to be moved, and press .
● Pr
ess
again to deselect it.
3
Use
/ to move to the target position, and press .
4
When the buttons are rearranged in the way you want, press the Back key.
Basic Operations
100
Changing the Default Settings for Functions
2JRY-02C
The default settings ar
e the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press
the Reset key. If you change these default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can
eliminate the need to specify the same settings every time you perform an action.
◼ Copy
For information about changeable setting items, see
<Change Default Settings>(P. 231) .
<Menu> <Copy Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the setting Change the default
value of the selected item <Apply>
● If you select <Initialize Default Settings> on the <Cop
y Settings> screen, you can restore the default settings.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 105)
Basic Operations
101
Entering Sleep Mode
2JRY-02E
The sleep mode function r
educes the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power ow to the
operation panel. If no operations are performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, the
machine enters sleep mode automatically.
When in sleep mode
● When the machine enters sleep mode, the display turns off.
Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode
● When the machine is in oper
ation
● When the Data indicator is lit up or blinking
● When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning
● When a paper jam occurs
● When the menu screen is displayed
● When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes
enters sleep mode when an error message is displayed.)
● When the machine is waiting for a wireless LAN connection or Direct Connection
Changing the Auto Sleep Time Value
Auto Sleep Time is a function that automatically puts the machine into the sleep mode if it remains idle for a
specied length of time. W
e recommend using the factory default settings (
<Timer Settings>(P. 227) ) to
r
educe power usage. If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters the auto
sleep mode, perform the procedure below.
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Auto Sleep Time> Set the amount of time that elapses before the
machine automatically enters sleep mode
Exiting Sleep Mode
You can press any key other than the power switch to exit the sleep mode.
Basic Operations
102
Copying
Copying ................................................................................................................................................................
104
Basic Copy Operations ...................................................................................................................................... 105
Canceling Copies .......................................................................................................................................... 108
Checking the Copying Status ........................................................................................................................ 109
Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality ............................................................................................................ 110
Selecting the Type of Original for Copying ................................................................................................... 111
Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness) .............................................................................................. 112
Useful Copy Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 113
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1) ................................................................................. 114
Collating Copies by Page .............................................................................................................................. 115
Making ID Card Copies ................................................................................................................................. 116
Copying
103
Copying
2JRY-02F
This chapter describes basic cop
y operations and various other useful functions, such as copying several pages onto a
single sheet.
◼ Using Basic Operations
Basic Copy Operations(P. 105)
Canceling Copies(P. 108)
Checking the Copying Status(P. 109)
◼ Enhancing Quality Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality(P. 110)
Selecting the Type of Original for
Cop
ying(P. 111)
Adjusting Sharpness for Copying
(Sharpness)(P
. 112)
◼ Using Useful Cop
y Functions
Useful Copy Functions(P. 113)
Copying Multiple Documents onto
One Sheet (N on 1)
(P. 114)
Collating Copies by Page(P. 115) Making ID Card Copies(P. 116)
Copying
104
Basic Copy Operations
2JRY-02H
This section describes the basic oper
ation procedure used to copy an original.
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 84)
2
Select <Copy> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 78)
3
Select <Number of Copies>.
4
Enter the number of copies, and press .
● If you have enter
ed an incorrect value, use the Reset key to clear it.
5
Specify the copy settings as necessary.
Adjusting Density
Enlarging or Reducing
Adjusting Density
You can adjust the density of the copy if the text or images in an original are too light
or dark. Y
ou can also automatically set an optimal density for an original.
<Density> Adjust the density
<Auto Density>
An optimal density for the original is automatically set.
<Original T
ype> is automatically set to <Text>.
Selecting the Type of Original for Copying(P. 111)
Copying
105
<Manual Density>
Use / to adjust the density.
Enlarging or Reducing
You can enlarge or reduce copies by using a preset copy ratio such as <A5->A4>, or
b
y setting a custom copy ratio in increments of 1 %.
● If you mak
e a setting for <N on 1> after setting the copy ratio, the setting of reduction ratio in <N on
1> takes priority.
<Copy Ratio> Select the copy ratio
<Custom Ratio>
Use / to enter the copy ratio, and press . You can set any copy ratio from 25% to 400% in 1%
incr
ements.
Preset copy ratio
Select a cop
y ratio.
● For
information about other copy settings, see
Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality(P
. 110) or
Useful Copy Functions(P. 113) .
Copying
106
6
Press
➠ Cop
ying starts.
● If you want to cancel, select <Cancel>
<Yes>. Canceling Copies(P. 108)
For N on 1 copying
For N on 1 copying, the screen prompting you to load the next original is displayed.
1
Place the next original on the platen glass, and Press
● Y
ou can also specify <Density> separately for each original.
● Repeat this step until you nish scanning the entir
e original.
2
Select <Start Copying>.
● When
the <Size/Settings Mismatch> or <The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Print?> message is
shown in the display.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 297)
When copying originals with text or images that extend to the edges of the page
● The edges of the original might not be copied. For mor
e information about the scan margins, see
Main
Unit(P
. 325) .
● If you always want to mak
e copies with the same settings:
Changing the Default Settings for
Functions
(P. 101)
LINKS
Checking the Copying Status(P. 109)
Copying
107
Canceling Copies
2JRY-02J
If you want to cancel cop
ying immediately after pressing
, select <Cancel> on the screen or press on the
oper
ation panel. You can also cancel copying after checking the copy status.
◼ Select <Cancel> on the Screen That is Displayed While Copying
◼ Pr
ess
to Cancel
◼ Check the cop
y job status before canceling
<Status Monitor> <Copy/Print Job> <Job Status> Select the document in the <Copy/Print Job
Status> scr
een
<Cancel> <Yes>
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 105)
Copying
108
Checking the Copying Status
2JRY-02K
Y
ou can check the current copy statuses for copied documents.
Useful in the Following Cases
● When some long time has alr
eady passed after scanning of your original to be copied but printing of the
document has not started yet, you may want to see the waiting list of the documents waiting to be printed.
1
Select <Status Monitor> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Copy/Print Job>.
3
Select <Job Status>.
4
Select the document whose status you want to check in the <Copy/Print Job Status>
scr
een, and press
.
➠ Displays detailed information about the document.
LINK
Basic Copy Operations(P. 105)
Canceling Copies(P. 108)
Copying
109
Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality
2JRY-02L
Y
ou can improve the copy quality by specifying more detailed settings, such as selecting the type of original.
Selecting the Type of Original for
Cop
ying(P. 111)
Adjusting Sharpness for Copying
(Sharpness)(P
. 112)
Copying
110
Selecting the Type of Original for Copying
2JRY-02R
You can select the optical image quality for the copy depending on the original type,
such as te
xt-only documents, documents with charts and graphs, or magazine
photos.
<Copy> <Original Type> Select the original type
<Text> Suitable when copying originals that only contain text.
<Text/Photo (High Speed)>
Suitable when copying originals that contain both text and photos. Priority is given to speed
o
ver image quality.
<Text/Photo> Suitable when copying originals that contain both text and photos.
<Photo>
Suitable when copying originals that contain printed photos, such as magazines or
pamphlets.
● If <T
ext/Photo (High Speed)>, <Text/Photo>, or <Photo> is selected and <Density> is set to <Auto Density>, it
changes to <Manual Density>.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 105)
Copying
111
Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness)
2JRY-02S
You can adjust sharpness of the copied image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen
blurr
ed text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of
magazine photos.
<Copy> <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness
Example:
If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil
Example:
If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 105)
Copying
112
Useful Copy Functions
2JRY-02U
Y
ou can copy multiple sheets onto one page, or copy by grouping sheets into complete sets in sequential page order.
Also, there is a function to copy both sides of a card, etc. onto one page.
Copying Multiple Documents onto
One Sheet (N on 1)
(P. 114)
Collating Copies by Page(P. 115) Making ID Card Copies(P. 116)
Copying
113
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)
2JRY-02W
You can reduce the size of a multiple-page original and arrange all pages on one side
of the paper. Y
ou can save the number of sheets as the document can be copied on
fewer pages than those of the original.
● Using <N on 1> r
educes the copy ratio automatically (the copy ratio is displayed on the screen). If the
copying process has not started, you can further reduce the image size by lowering the numeric value that is
automatically displayed. But the edges of the original might not be copied if you increase it.
● <N on 1> is not available when using <ID Card Copy>.
● When you copy multiple originals onto one page, margins may be created in the copied image.
<Copy> <N on 1> Select the number of pages to be combined Select the original size on the
<Scan Size> scr
een
Number of pages to be combined
Select the number of pages to be combined on one side of paper. For e
xample, <4 on 1> means that "a four-
page original can be combined on a single sheet."
<Select Layout>
Specify ho
w to arrange the originals on the page.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 105)
Copying
114
Collating Copies by Page
2JRY-02X
When preparing multiple copies of multi-page originals, set <Collate> to <On> to
collate copies in sequential page or
der. This function is useful when preparing
handouts for meetings or presentations.
<Copy> <Collate> <On>
<Off>
The copies ar
e grouped by page and not collated. For example, if you are making three copies of a ve-page
original, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5.
<On>
The copies ar
e grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are making three
copies of a ve-page original, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 105)
Copying
115
Making ID Card Copies
2JRY-02Y
You can use <ID Card Copy> to copy the front and back sides of a card onto the same side of
a page. This function is useful when cop
ying a driver's license or ID card.
● <Cop
y Ratio> is automatically set to <100%>.
Place the card on the platen glass ID Card Copy key Turn the card over
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 105)
Copying
116
Printing
Printing ................................................................................................................................................................
118
Printing from a Computer ................................................................................................................................ 119
Canceling Prints ........................................................................................................................................... 121
Checking the Printing Status and Log ........................................................................................................... 123
Printing
117
Printing
2JRY-030
Y
ou can print documents on your computer by using the printer driver.
◼ Printing from a Computer
You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver.
Printing from a Computer(P. 119)
Printing from Mobile Devices
● Linking mobile de
vices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to
print photos and web pages. The machine also supports Google Cloud Print™.
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 139)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 157)
Printing
118
Printing from a Computer
2JRY-031
Y
ou can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful
settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing, that enable you to print your documents in various ways.
Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as installing the printer driver on your
computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
About the Printer Driver Help(P. 119)
Basic Printing Operations(P. 119)
About the Printer Driver Help
Clicking [Help] on the printer driver scr
een displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed
descriptions that are not in the User's Guide.
Basic Printing Operations
This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.
Paper settings on the machine
● Normally
, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in the drawer before
proceeding to printing.
1
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2
Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3
Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
● Switch the tab accor
ding to the settings.
Printing
119
4
Click [Print] or [OK].
➠ Printing starts.
● If you want to cancel printing, see
Canceling Prints(P. 121) .
LINKS
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 123)
Printing
120
Canceling Prints
2JRY-032
Y
ou can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.
From a Computer(P. 121)
From the Operation Panel(P. 122)
From a Computer
You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.
1
Double-click the printer icon.
When the printer icon is not displayed
● Open
the printer folder (
Displaying the Printer Folder(P
. 341) ), right-click the printer driver icon for
this machine, and click [See what's printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for this machine).
2
Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document]
[Cancel].
3
Click [Yes].
➠ Printing of the selected document is canceled.
● Se
veral pages may be output after you cancel printing.
Canceling from the Remote UI
● Y
ou can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI:
Checking Current Status of Print
Documents
(P. 201)
Canceling from an application
● On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].
Printing
121
From the Operation Panel
Cancel printing using
or <Status Monitor>.
◼ Pr
ess
to Cancel
If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed
Select the document you want to cancel, and select <Yes>.
◼ Check the Print Job Status Befor
e Canceling
<Status Monitor> <Copy/Print Job> <Job Status> Select the document in the <Copy/Print Job
Status> scr
een
<Cancel> <Yes>
● Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 119)
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 123)
Printing
122
Checking the Printing Status and Log
2JRY-033
Y
ou can check the current print statuses and the logs for printed documents.
● When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the print logs. <Display Job Log>(P. 245)
Useful in the Following Cases
● When your documents ar
e not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the
documents waiting to be printed.
● When you cannot nd your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an
error has occurred.
1
Select <Status Monitor>.
2
Select <Copy/Print Job>.
3
Check the print statuses and logs.
To check the print statuses
1
<Job Status>
Select the document whose status you want to check.
➠ Displays detailed information about the document.
To check the print logs
1
<Print Job Log>
Select the document whose log you want to check.
● <OK> is displayed when a document was printed successfully
, and <Error> is displayed when a
document failed to be printed because it was canceled or there was some error.
➠ Displays detailed information about the document.
● The displayed document name or user name may not reect the actual document or user name.
Printing
123
When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>
● This number r
epresents an error code.
Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 307)
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 119)
Canceling Prints(P. 121)
Printing
124
Scanning
Scanning ..............................................................................................................................................................
126
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals ......................................................................................................... 127
Scanning and Saving to a Computer ............................................................................................................. 128
Scanning Using the Shortcut Key .................................................................................................................. 130
Canceling Sending Documents ..................................................................................................................... 133
Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan) .................................................................................................. 134
Scanning Documents from an Application .................................................................................................... 135
Using ScanGear MF ...................................................................................................................................... 137
Scanning
125
Scanning
2JRY-034
Y
ou can scan original documents by using the operation panel of the machine or an application on a computer.
Whichever way you use, the scanned originals are converted into electronic le formats such as PDFs. Use the scan
function to convert large-volume paper documents into les so that you can organize them easily.
● T
o use this machine as a scanner, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of
software to a computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the
online manual website. To connect the machine to your computer via a network, you must register the
machine to the installed software.
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 62)
● Depending on the oper
ating system and the version of the scanner driver or applications you are using, the
screens in this manual may differ from your screens.
◼ Using Basic Oper
ations
You can scan and save originals to your computer by using the operation panel of the machine.
Basic Operations for Scanning
Originals(P
. 127)
Canceling Sending Documents(P. 133)
◼ Scanning from a Computer
You can scan originals placed on the machine from a computer. The scanned originals are saved to the computer. You
can scan using MF Scan Utility (included with the machine), or with other applications such as an image-processing or
word-processing application.
Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)(P. 134)
Scanning from Mobile Devices
● Linking mobile de
vices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to
scan originals set on this machine.
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 139)
Scanning
126
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals
2JRY-035
This section describes the basic pr
ocedures for scanning originals.
◼ Scanning
Scanning and Saving to a Computer(P. 128)
◼ Oper
ating Jobs
Canceling Sending Documents(P. 133)
Scanning
127
Scanning and Saving to a Computer
2JRY-036
The sequence of "
scanning an original and saving it to a computer" can only be done when scanning from the
machine. Scan while specifying what computer originals will be saved to; whether to scan originals in color or black
and white; whether to save originals as PDFs or JPEGs; and other settings. Incidentally, if you want to specify a
computer connected to the network as the destination, you must register the machine with the computer in advance
(
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 62) ).
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 84)
2
Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 78)
3
Select <Computer>
● If only a computer connected to the machine via USB is used, proceed to step 5.
4
Select the destination computer.
5
Select the scan type.
● The scan types and settings that ar
e displayed can be conrmed and changed by using MF Scan Utility. For
more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.
● If
you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual
website.
6
Press
.
➠ Scanning of the original starts.
● If you want to cancel, see Canceling Sending Documents(P. 133) .
● Y
ou cannot scan while the ScanGear MF is displayed. Close
the screen before scanning.
Scanning
128
When scanning is complete
When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (when the le format is PDF).
1
If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and
press .
● Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
● When ther
e is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2
Select <Finish Scanning>.
➠ The save destination folder is displayed on the computer.
About the save destination folder
● By default, the scanned data is saved to the [My Documents] folder. A subfolder named with the scanning
date is cr
eated, and the data is saved to that folder.
● You can change the save destination from the MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on
MF Scan Utility.
Scanning
129
Scanning Using the Shortcut Key
2JRY-037
Place an original on the machine, and select <Scan> <Scan -> PC1> or <Scan -> PC2>, and scanning starts
immediately
. The type of scan (color or black and white), the save destination for the original, and other settings can
be registered to the menu items, and originals can be scanned using those settings. This section describes how to
register settings in the menu item and scan with it.
Registering Your Settings in the Shortcut Key(P. 130)
Using the Shortcut Key(P. 131)
Registering Your Settings in the Shortcut Key
Register the computer that scanned images are saved in and the type of scan to the shortcut key.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Scan Settings>.
3
Select <Shortcut Key Settings> <Register>.
4
Select the shortcut key to which you want to register settings.
5
Select the type of connection that is used between the machine and computer.
<Off>
Select this setting to er
ase registered settings.
<USB Connection>
Select this setting if the machine and computer ar
e connected via USB.
<Network Connection>
Select this setting if the machine and computer ar
e connected via a network.
6
Select the destination computer.
● This scr
een is not displayed if you select <USB Connection> in step 5.
7
Select the scan type.
● The scan types and settings that ar
e displayed can be conrmed and changed by using MF Scan Utility. For
more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.
Scanning
130
● If
you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual
website.
◼ Checking the Registered Settings
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <Shortcut Key Settings> <Conrm Destination> Select shortcut
k
ey
Using the Shortcut Key
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 84)
2
Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 78)
3
Select <Scan -> PC1> or <Scan -> PC2>.
● T
o check the settings registered in the key, see
Checking the Registered Settings(P. 131) .
● Scanning starts.
● T
o cancel, see
Canceling Sending Documents(P. 133) .
● Y
ou cannot scan while the ScanGear MF is displayed. Close
the screen before scanning.
When scanning is complete
When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (when the le format is PDF).
1
If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and
pr
ess
.
● Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
● When ther
e is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2
Select <Finish Scanning>.
Scanning
131
➠ The save destination folder is displayed on the computer.
About the save destination folder
● By default, the scanned data is saved to the [My Documents] folder. A subfolder named with the scanning
date is cr
eated, and the data is saved to that folder.
● You can change the save destination from the MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on
MF Scan Utility.
Scanning
132
Canceling Sending Documents
2JRY-038
If you want to cancel sending documents immediately after starting scan, select <Cancel> on the display or pr
ess
. You can also cancel sending documents after checking the sending status.
◼ Select <Cancel> to cancel
◼ Pr
ess
to cancel
If the screen displays a list of documents when is pressed
Originals have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel, and select <Yes>.
LINKS
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 127)
Scanning
133
Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)
2JRY-039
T
o scan from a computer, you can use MF Scan Utility or an application such as an image processing or word
processing application. If you use ScanGear MF supplied with the machine, you can congure advanced scan settings
(
Using ScanGear MF(P. 137) ).
Scanning Using MF Scan Utility
MF Scan Utility is an application included with the machine that enables you to scan
documents or images to a computer. Y
ou can forward the scanned data to a specied
application, or attach it to an e-mail message. For more information, click [Instructions]
on MF Scan Utility.
● If you ar
e a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual
website.
Scanning Using an Application
You can scan images by using an application such as a word-processing or
image-pr
ocessing application, and load the images directly into the application.
You do not need to start another application to scan.
Scanning Documents
fr
om an Application(P. 135)
Scanning
134
Scanning Documents from an Application
2JRY-03A
You can scan originals from applications such as image-processing or word-
pr
ocessing software. The scanned image is directly loaded in the application,
allowing you to edit or process the image immediately. The following procedure
varies depending on the application.
● The application must be compatible with TW
AIN or WIA
*
. For more information, see the instruction manual
for your application.
*
TWAIN is a standard for connecting image input devices, such as scanners, with computers. WIA is a function that is an
integrated standard in Windows.
1
Place the original(s).
Placing Originals(P. 84)
● The
second or subsequent originals may not be scanned, or an error message may be displayed
depending on the application. In such a case, place and scan one original at a time.
● When <Auto Online for Remote Scan> is set to <Off>, you must select <Scan>
<Remote
Scanner> in the
Home screen to bring the machine online.
<Auto Online for Remote Scan>(P. 244)
2
From the application, select the start scan command.
● The pr
ocedure for selecting the start scan command varies depending on the application. For more
information, see the instruction manual for your application.
3
Select the scanner driver for this machine.
● Select ScanGear MF or WIA. If you select ScanGear MF
, you can congure advanced scan settings.
4
Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
5
Click [Scan].
➠ Scanning of the original starts.
● When scanning is complete, the scanned image is forwar
ded to an application.
How to use ScanGear MF
● Click
on the ScanGear MF screen, and see the Help.
Scanning
135
LINKS
Using ScanGear MF(P. 137)
Scanning
136
Using ScanGear MF
2JRY-03C
ScanGear MF is a scanner driver included with the machine. You can use ScanGear
MF to congur
e advanced scan settings when you scan. The way of
starting ScanGear MF differs depending of the way of scanning from the computer.
Starting from MF Scan Utility
When scanning from MF Scan Utility, click [ScanGear] to start ScanGear MF. For more information, click
[Instructions] on MF Scan Utility
.
● If you ar
e a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual
website.
Starting from an application
To scan from applications such as image-processing or word-processing software, select ScanGear MF as
scanner driver. Scanning Documents from an Application(P. 135)
Functions of ScanGear MF
● Pr
eviewing the image before scanning
● Specifying the scanning area
● Adjusting the detailed image quality
How to use ScanGear MF
● Click
on the ScanGear MF screen, and see the Help.
Scanning
137
Linking with Mobile Devices
Linking with Mobile Devices ....................................................................................................................
139
Connecting with Mobile Devices ...................................................................................................................... 140
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) .............................................................................. 141
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) ...................................................................................................... 142
Utilizing the Machine through Applications .................................................................................................... 145
Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................................... 146
Printing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 151
Scanning with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................. 154
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ............................................................................................................................ 156
Using Google Cloud Print .................................................................................................................................. 157
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control .............................................................................................. 159
Linking with Mobile Devices
138
Linking with Mobile Devices
2JRY-03E
Linking the machine with mobile de
vices such as smart phones and tablets enables you to use an appropriate
application to perform printing, or other operation with ease. In addition, you can operate the machine from mobile
devices via remote control to conrm printing status and change the settings of the machine.
Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 140)
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 142)
Utilizing the Machine through Applications(P. 145)
Using AirPrint(P. 146)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 157)
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control(P. 159)
● Depending on your mobile de
vice, the machine may not operate correctly.
Linking with Mobile Devices
139
Connecting with Mobile Devices
2JRY-03F
Ther
e are two methods used to connect a mobile device with the machine: connecting via a wireless LAN router, and
communicating wirelessly and directly with the machine. Select a connection method in accordance with the
communication environment and the device you are using.
◼ Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router
Just as connecting a computer to the machine, connect a mobile device to the machine via a wireless LAN router.
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)(P. 141)
◼ Connecting Dir
ectly
Directly connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly without using wireless LAN. It is possible to immediately
connect to the machine wirelessly even outside of a wireless LAN environment.
Connecting Directly (Access Point
Mode)(P
. 142)
Linking with Mobile Devices
140
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)
2JRY-03H
If a wir
eless LAN router is connected to the network connected to the machine, you can establish a communication
with a mobile device via the wireless LAN router in the same way for a computer. For information about how to
connect a mobile device to your wireless LAN router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer. Connect the machine to a router via the wired or wireless LAN.
Setting Up the Network
Envir
onment(P. 11)
● If your mobile de
vices do not support IPv6, use the IPv4 address.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)
1
Select <Status Monitor> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Network Information>.
3
Display the IP address of the machine.
IPv4
● Select <IPv4>
<IP Address>.
IPv6
● Select <IPv6>
<Link-Local Address> <IP Address>.
4
Connect from the mobile device to the IP address that appears on the screen.
Linking with Mobile Devices
141
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)
2JRY-03J
Even in an envir
onment without a wireless LAN router, using "Access Point Mode," which can directly connect a mobile
device to the machine wirelessly, enables you to connect the mobile device on hand to the machine without dicult
settings.
Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 142)
Connecting Directly(P. 143)
Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)
Establish a connection by using Access Point Mode in the following order.
Check the network settings of the machine.
● Set the IPv4 addr
ess.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)
Preparing the mobile device
● Congur
e settings to connect the mobile device to Wi-Fi.
Put the machine into the connection standby status.
● <Menu> <Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> set <Use Direct
Connection> to <On>.
If connected to the network by wireless LAN
Items for selecting the Direct Connection method is displayed.
<Dir
ect Connection Only>
Connection by wireless LAN becomes unavailable. Select when only using
Direct Connection.
<Wireless LAN/Direct Conn. (Auto Switch)>
The wireless LAN connection is disabled while the direct connection is active.
The machine automatically switches to wireless LAN connection when the
Linking with Mobile Devices
142
direct connection is terminated. This option is selected when you want to
switch between dir
ect connection and wireless LAN connection.
Specifying the value for time until auto termination
● Y
ou can specify the time to automatically establish a disconnection when the direct connection is enabled.
<Time Until Direct Connection Termination>(P. 216)
Connecting multiple mobile de
vices at the same time
● Congure the machine's SSID and network key arbitrarily. The network key can be left blank.
<Access
Point Mode Settings>
(P. 216)
Connecting Directly
● It may tak
e time until a connection of the machine and the mobile device is established.
1
Select <Direct Connection> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
● If a message appears, continue b
y following the instructions on the screen.
2
Select <Display SSID/Network Key>.
3
Congure the Wi-Fi settings fr
om the mobile device using the SSID and network key
information that appear on the display.
4
When the target operation is completed, press
, then select <Disconnect> <Yes>.
● Select <Connection Information> on the screen under the direct connection to check the connected mobile
device.
● While connecting via dir
ect connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the
mobile device you are using.
● If a wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and
network key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.
● If the status without data transmission between the mobile device and the machine continues during
communication by direct connection, the communication may end.
● Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection.
Linking with Mobile Devices
143
● When you nish the desir
ed operation, be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the
mobile device. If they remain connected, power saving performance of sleep mode degrades.
● If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may
prevent proper communication after using the direct connection.
Linking with Mobile Devices
144
Utilizing the Machine through Applications
2JRY-03K
Perform printing and other oper
ations from the mobile device connected to the machine using applications. Various
applications including those exclusive to Canon are supported. Use properly in accordance with your device, the
application, and the situation.
◼ Using Canon PRINT Business
This application is used to perform printing and other operations from mobile devices that support iOS/Android. When
printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on supported operating
systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the application's Help or the Canon website (http://
www.canon.com/gomp/).
● Y
ou can download Canon PRINT Business for free, but you will be charged the Internet connection fee.
◼ Printing with Canon Print Service
Y
ou can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on
supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).
◼ Printing by Mopria
®
The machine also supports Mopria
®
. Using Mopria
®
enables you to print from mobile devices that support Android
using common operations and settings, even if manufacturers and models differ. For example, if you are using
printers supporting Mopria
®
made by multiple manufacturers or a printer supporting Mopria
®
that is located in a
place you are visiting, you can print without installing an application exclusive for each manufacturer or model. For
more information on supporting models or operation environments, see http://www.mopria.org.
◼ Printing with Google Cloud Print
Y
ou can use applications and services which support Google Cloud Print to print from a computer or mobile device
without using a printer driver.
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 157)
Linking with Mobile Devices
145
Using AirPrint
2JRY-03L
This section describes the settings r
equired to use AirPrint and the procedures to be performed using Apple devices.
AirPrint Settings
Conguring AirPrint Settings(P
. 146)
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 149)
Functions of the AirPrint
Printing with AirPrint(P. 151)
Scanning with AirPrint(P. 154)
Troubleshooting
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 156)
Conguring AirPrint Settings
You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying
the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
● If you ar
e using a mobile device, such as an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.
3
Select [Network Settings]
[AirPrint Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Specify the required settings.
Linking with Mobile Devices
146
[Use AirPrint]
Select the check bo
x to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.
[Printer Name]
Enter the name of the machine. If an mDNS name has already been registered in [mDNS Settings] (
Conguring DNS(P
. 51) ), the registered name is displayed.
[Location]
Enter the location of the machine. If a location has already been registered in [Device Information] ([System
Management] in [System Management Settings] (Settings/Registration)), the registered name is displayed.
[Latitude]
Enter the latitude of the location where the machine is installed.
[Longitude]
Enter the longitude of the location where the machine is installed.
6
Click [OK].
If you select [Use AirPrint], the following settings are set to on.
● <Use HT
TP>
● [IPP Print Settings]
● [Use mDNS] (IPv4 Settings)
● [Use mDNS] (IPv6 Settings)
● <Network Link Scan Settings>
● If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specied, you may be unable to print any mor
e from the
Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because [mDNS Name] (
Conguring DNS
(P. 51) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the Mac
again.
● Entering the printer name makes it easier to identify multiple printers that support AirPrint.
Linking with Mobile Devices
147
◼ Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint
If you want to disable functions that you ar
e not going to use with AirPrint or encrypt communications, congure the
necessary setting using the operation panel or Remote UI.
Changing Print Settings
To perform printing with AirPrint, IPP protocol is used.
Turning the Function On/Off
You can specify whether to perform printing with AirPrint. The factory default setting is [On].
Log in to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode ( Starting Remote UI(P. 198) )
[Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [Edit] in [IPP Print Settings]
Clear or select the [Use IPP Printing] check box [OK]
Changing the TLS Setting
Y
ou can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing printing with AirPrint. The factory
default setting is [On].
Log in to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode ( Starting Remote UI(P. 198) )
[Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [Edit] in [IPP Print Settings]
Clear or select the [Use TLS] check box [OK]
Changing the Scan Setting
Congure the scan setting using AirPrint.
Set the Function to Enable or Disable
Y
ou can turn on/off the scan function available with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On>.
<Menu> <Network Settings> <TCP/IP Settings> <Network Link Scan Settings> Set
<Use Network Link Scan> to <Off> or <On>
Change TLS Settings
Y
ou can specify whether or not to encrypt TLS communications when scanning data using AirPrint. The factory
default setting is <On>.
<Menu> <Network Settings> <TCP/IP Settings> <Network Link Scan Settings> Set
<Use TLS> to <Off> or <On>
Linking with Mobile Devices
148
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint
You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view
information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge, etc. Further, you can congure security function
settings.
1
Select [System Preferences]
[Printers & Scanners], then add the machine to the Mac
you ar
e using.
● If the machine has alr
eady been added, this operation is not required.
2
Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].
3
Click [Options & Supplies].
4
Click [Show Printer Webpage].
5
Log in to the Remote UI.
● T
o change the AirPrint settings, it is necessary to log in as an administrator.
◼ AirPrint-Dedicated Page
When you log in with administrator privileges, the AirPrint-dedicated page is displayed as shown below.
[AirPrint Settings]
Enables you to check the values enter
ed in the AirPrint settings, such as the name and location of the
machine. You can click [Edit] to change the settings.
Linking with Mobile Devices
149
[Other Settings]
[Print Security Settings]
Congur
e the print security settings using TLS or authentication.
[Scan Security Settings]
Congure the scan security settings using TLS.
[TLS Settings]
Enables you to change the key and certicate used for TLS.
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for
TLS(P. 179)
[Key and Certicate Settings]
Enables you to generate and install a key and certicate, or request a certicate to be issued.
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 179)
[Consumables Information]
Enables you to check the information of a paper sour
ce and consumables of the machine and the device
version.
Trademarks
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari ar
e trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Linking with Mobile Devices
150
Printing with AirPrint
2JRY-03R
Y
ou can print from an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, or Mac without using a printer driver.
Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 151)
Printing from a Mac(P. 152)
System Requir
ements
One of the following Apple devices is required to print with AirPrint.
● iPad (all models)
● iPhone (3GS or later)
● iPod touch (3r
d generation or later)
● Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)
*
*
OS X v10.9 or later when using a USB connection
Network Environment
One of the following environments is required.
● An envir
onment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN
● An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected directly
● An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB
● For printing, it is r
equired to set [Use IPP Printing] to [On].
Changing the Setting of Functions Available
with AirPrint
(P. 148)
Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
1
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Apple device.
● For ho
w to make sure of this, see
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11) .
● For information on the Dir
ect Connection, see
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 142) .
2
From the application on your Apple device, tap
to display the menu options.
Linking with Mobile Devices
151
3
Tap [Print].
4
Select this machine from [Printer].
● The printers connected to the network ar
e displayed here. Select this machine in this step.
● The
screen for selecting this machine in [Printer] is not displayed on applications that do not support
AirPrint. You cannot print by using those applications.
5
Specify the print settings as necessary.
● The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you ar
e using.
6
Tap [Print].
➠ Printing starts.
Checking the print status
● During printing, pr
ess the Home button of the Apple device twice
tap [Print].
Printing from a Mac
1
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.
● For ho
w to make sure of this, see
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11) .
2
Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
● If the machine has alr
eady been added, this operation is not required.
3
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
● Ho
w to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual or Help for the application you are using.
4
Select the machine in the print dialog box.
● The printers connected to the Mac ar
e displayed. Select this machine in this step.
5
Specify the print settings as necessary.
Linking with Mobile Devices
152
● The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you ar
e using.
6
Click [Print].
➠ Printing starts.
Linking with Mobile Devices
153
Scanning with AirPrint
2JRY-03S
Y
ou can use AirPrint to transfer the data scanned by the machine directly to a Mac.
System Requirements
To scan with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed. To scan using TLS, you need a Mac with
OS X 10.11 or later installed.
Network Envir
onment
One of the following environments is required.
● An envir
onment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN
● An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB
● For scanning, it is r
equired to set <Use Network Link Scan> to <On>.
Changing the Setting of Functions
Available with AirPrint(P
. 148)
● Before scanning, it is required to put the machine into online state. When the auto online function (
<Auto
Online for Remote Scan>(P
. 244) ) is set to <Off>, rst put the machine into online state by selecting
<Scan>
<Remote Scanner>, then start the procedure for scanning.
● Y
ou cannot scan while settings for operations are being made, or while the machine is performing any
operation whatsoever.
Scanning from a Mac
1
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.
● For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11) .
2
Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
● If the machine has alr
eady been added, this operation is not required.
3
Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].
4
Click [Scan].
Linking with Mobile Devices
154
5
Click [Open Scanner].
➠ The [Scanner] scr
een is displayed.
6
Congure the scan settings as necessary
.
7
Click [Scan].
➠ The original is scanned, and the image is displayed.
Linking with Mobile Devices
155
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
2JRY-03U
If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the follo
wing solutions.
● Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, rst turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10
seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.
● Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.
● Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may
take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.
● Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.
● For printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and that the machine contains a sucient amount
remaining in the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge.
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 149)
● For
scanning, make sure that the machine's setting for Network Link Scan is <On>.
Changing the Setting of
Functions Available with AirPrint
(P. 148)
Linking with Mobile Devices
156
Using Google Cloud Print
2JRY-03W
Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user with a Google account to print fr
om a smartphone, tablet, or
computer connected to the Internet using applications compatible with Google Cloud Print. Unlike conventional
printing from a computer, it does not require a printer driver.
Checking the Settings of the Machine(P. 157)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 157)
● An envir
onment in which you can connect to the internet is required when registering the machine and
when printing using Google Cloud Print. In addition, the customer is responsible for any fees regarding
internet connection.
● Google Cloud Print may not be available, depending on your country or region.
● A Google account is r
equired to use Google Cloud Print. If you do not have a Google account, create one on
the Google website.
Checking the Settings of the Machine
Check the follo
wing before conguring cloud printing.
● Make sure that the IPv4 address or IPv6 address is specied for the machine, and that the machine is able to
communicate with computers on a network.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 14)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)
● Check whether the date and time of the machine ar
e specied correctly.
Setting the Date/Time(P. 9)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print
Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print enables you to print fr
om anywhere using the service.
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
Linking with Mobile Devices
157
1
Start the Remote UI and log in as an administrator.
Starting Remote UI(P. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Network Settings] [Google Cloud Print Settings].
4
Click [Edit] for [Basic Settings].
5
Select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box
[OK].
6
Click [Register] in [Registration Status].
Re-Registering the Machine
● T
o re-register the machine, delete its registration before registering it again.
7
Click the URL link displayed for [URL for Registration].
8
Follow the instructions on the screen to register the machine.
➠ Printing can no
w be performed from applications that support Google Cloud Print, such as Google
Chrome™.
● For
information on the latest applications that support Google Cloud Print, check the Google Cloud
Print home page.
Conguring Settings on the Oper
ation Panel
● You can also enable or disable the Cloud Print function from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<Google Cloud
Print Settings>(P
. 246)
Registering from a Mobile Device or Google Chrome
● You can register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome. The machine's display shows the
conrmation screen before completion of the registration. Select <Yes> to complete the registration.
● For information on registration methods, see the manual of your device or the Google Cloud Print website.
Linking with Mobile Devices
158
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control
2JRY-03X
Y
ou can use the Remote UI from a smart phone or tablet Web browser. You can conrm the machine status or
perform various settings from a mobile device.
Supported Web Browsers
Web browsers supporting the Remote UI for mobile devices are the following.
Andr
oid OS
● Chrome
iOS
● Safari
Starting the Remote UI from Mobile Devices
Enter the IP addr
ess of the machine on the Web browser to start the Remote UI. Prior to operation, conrm the IP
address set for the machine (
Viewing Network Settings(P. 34) ). If it is unkno
wn, ask your network administrator.
1
Start the Web browser of the mobile device.
2
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address entry column.
● If you want to use an IPv6 addr
ess, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets.
Example: http://[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/
● For
a "Smartphone Version" of the Remote UI, a portion of items displayed are omitted. If you want to
conrm all of the items, see the "PC Version."
LINKS
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 197)
Linking with Mobile Devices
159
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine ...............................................................................................................................
161
Setting Access Privileges .................................................................................................................................. 163
Setting the System Manager PIN .................................................................................................................. 164
Setting a Remote UI PIN ............................................................................................................................... 166
Conguring the Network Security Settings .................................................................................................... 168
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ............................................................................................. 170
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings ......................................................................................... 171
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings ..................................................................................... 174
Changing Port Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 176
Setting a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................. 177
Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS .................................................................................................. 179
Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication .......................................................... 181
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) ........................................................................ 184
Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication .......................................................... 187
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings ......................................................................................... 189
Restricting the Machine's Functions ................................................................................................................ 193
Restricting USB Functions ............................................................................................................................. 194
Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 195
Disabling Remote UI ..................................................................................................................................... 196
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ................................................................................... 197
Starting Remote UI ....................................................................................................................................... 198
Checking the Status and Logs ....................................................................................................................... 201
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ................................................................................................... 205
Updating the Firmware ..................................................................................................................................... 208
Initializing Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 210
Managing the Machine
160
Managing the Machine
2JRY-03Y
T
o reduce the various risks associated with the use of this machine, such as leaks of personal information or
unauthorized use by third parties, constant and effective security measures are required. An administrator should
manage important settings, such as access privileges and security settings, to ensure that the machine is used safely.
◼ Conguring the Basic Management System
Setting Access Privileges(P. 163) Conguring the Network Security Settings(P
. 168)
◼ Pr
eparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse
Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 193)
◼ Ensuring Effective Management
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 197)
Managing the Machine
161
◼ Managing the System Congur
ation and Settings
Updating the Firmware(P. 208) Initializing Settings(P. 210)
Managing the Machine
162
Setting Access Privileges
2JRY-040
Pr
otect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine. When
privileges are set, the user must enter a PIN to change settings or access the Remote UI.
Access privileges ar
e divided into two types: System Manager Mode and General User Mode. System Manager Mode
has full access privileges, and a System Manager PIN can be set to restrict logon in this mode. And by setting a Remote
UI Access PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI in General User Mode and in System Manager Mode without a
System Manager PIN set.
System Manager PIN
System Manager PIN is intended exclusively for Administrators having full access privileges. If you specify this
PIN, you need to log on to the machine using this PIN in or
der to access <Network Settings> or <System
Management Settings>. Set the System Manager PIN when you need different access privilege levels for
administrators and general users.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)
This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI. Setting a
Remote UI PIN
(P. 166)
Managing the Machine
163
Setting the System Manager PIN
2JRY-041
Set a System Manager PIN that is intended e
xclusively for Administrators. You can access <Network Settings>, <System
Management Settings>, etc. only when the PIN has been entered correctly. It is recommended that only
Administrators know the PIN.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <System Management Settings>.
3
Select <System Manager Information Settings> <System Manager PIN>.
4
Press .
5
Specify the System Manager PIN.
● Enter a number of up to se
ven digits, and select <Apply>.
● When <PIN (Conrm)> is displayed, enter the PIN once again to conrm.
● Y
ou cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
● To disable the PIN, select
to leave the text box blank, and then select <Apply>.
Setting the System Manager Name
1
Select <System Manager Name>.
2
Enter the System Manager Name, and select <Apply>.
● On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 83) .
● Do not forget your PIN. If you forget your PIN, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help
line.
Managing the Machine
164
Conguring settings via the Remote UI
● Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registr
ation]
[System
Management] [Edit] and specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen.
● By using the Remote UI, you can r
egister a variety of information, including contact information,
Administrator comments, the installation location of the machine, as well as the settings that you can
register by using the operation panel. The registered information can be viewed on the [Device Information]
page of the Remote UI.
Checking System Manager Information(P. 203)
If a System Manager PIN is Set
● If you try to access <Network Settings> or <System Management Settings>, the
follo
wing screen is displayed. Enter the set PIN.
● Entering a PIN is also required when logging on in System Manager Mode in
the Remote UI.
Starting Remote UI(P. 198)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 163)
Managing the Machine
165
Setting a Remote UI PIN
2JRY-042
Y
ou can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Security Settings] [Remote UI Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use Remote UI Access PIN] check box and set the PIN.
[Use Remote UI Access PIN]
If you select the check box, you must enter a PIN to access the Remote UI.
[Set/Change PIN]
To set or change a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Conrm] text
boxes.
6
Click [OK].
Using the operation panel
● Remote UI Access PIN settings can also be accessed fr
om <Menu> in the Home screen.
<Remote UI
Settings>(P
. 244)
Managing the Machine
166
If <System Management Settings> are initialized
● The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, r
eset the PIN.
<Initialize
Menu>(P
. 247)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 163)
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
Managing the Machine
167
Conguring the Network Security Settings
2JRY-043
Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses fr
om attacks by malicious third parties, such as sning, spoong,
and tampering of data as it ows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these
attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.
Firewall Settings
Unauthorized access by third parties, as well as network attacks and intrusions, can be blocked by limiting
communication only to de
vices that have a specic IP address or MAC address.
Restricting Communication
b
y Using Firewalls(P. 170)
Changing Port Numbers
A protocol that is used to exchange information with other devices is assigned port numbers that are
pr
edetermined according to the type of protocol. The port number must be the same for all communication
devices; therefore, changing it to an arbitrary number is important to prevent hacking from outside.
Changing Port Numbers(P. 176)
Proxy Settings
When the client devices are connected to an external network, communication is established through the proxy
server. When the pr
oxy server is used, websites can be browsed more safely, therefore, security can be
expected to be enhanced.
Setting a Proxy(P. 177)
TLS Encrypted Communication
TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web
browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine
from a computer via the Remote UI. Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 179)
Managing the Machine
168
IEEE 802.1X Authentication
IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively
managing user authentication information. If a de
vice tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must
go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.
Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication
to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point)
blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client
device.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings
(P. 189)
Managing the Machine
169
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls
2JRY-044
Without pr
oper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are
connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet lter, a feature that
restricts communication to devices with specied IP addresses or MAC addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 171)
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 174)
Managing the Machine
170
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings
2JRY-045
Y
ou can either limit communication to only devices with specied IP addresses, or block devices with specied IP
addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Security Settings] [IP Address Filter].
4
Click [Edit] to specify a lter type.
[IPv4 Address: Inbound Filter]
Restrict data r
eceived by the machine from a computer by specifying an IPv4 address.
[IPv6 Address: Inbound Filter]
Restrict data received by the machine from a computer by specifying an IPv6 address.
5
Specify the settings for packet ltering.
Managing the Machine
171
[Block
ed Addresses]
Register addresses to be blocked, as well as check or delete registered blocked addresses.
[Allo
wed Addresses]
Register addresses to be allowed, as well as check or delete registered allowed addresses.
1
Select the [Use Filter] check box.
● Select the check bo
x to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
2
Specify the address.
● Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click
[Add].
Registered address Result
[Blocked Addresses]
Restricts communication (received) with devices having their IP addresses entered
for [Addr
ess to Register]. Communication is allowed with devices with any other IP
addresses.
[Allowed Addresses]
Allows communication (received) only with devices having their IP addresses entered
for [Address to Register], and restricts communication with devices with any other IP
addresses.
Registered as both
Allows communication (received) only with devices having their IP addresses
registered in [Allowed Addresses], and restricts communication with devices with any
other IP addresses. However, communication is restricted for IP addresses also
registered in [Blocked Addresses].
Check for entry errors
● If IP addr
esses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI,
in which case you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.
<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 242)
Managing the Machine
172
<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 242)
Entry form for IP addresses
Description Example
Entering a single address
IPv4:
Delimit numbers with periods.
192.168.0.10
IPv6:
Delimit alphanumeric char
acters with
colons.
fe80::10
Specifying a range of addresses
Insert a hyphen between the
addresses.
192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
Specifying a range of addresses with a pr
ex
(IPv6 only)
Enter the address, followed by a slash
and a number indicating the prex
length.
fe80::1234/64
Deleting an IP address from exceptions
● Select an IP addr
ess and click [Delete].
3
Click [OK].
Using the operation panel
● Y
ou can also enable or disable IP address ltering from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 242)
<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 242)
LINKS
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 174)
Managing the Machine
173
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings
2JRY-046
Y
ou can limit communication to only devices with specied MAC addresses.
This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Security Settings] [MAC Address Filter].
4
Click [Edit] for the target MAC address lter.
[Inbound Filter]
Select to r
estrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying MAC addresses.
5
Specify the settings for packet ltering.
1
Select the [Use Filter] check box.
● Select the check bo
x to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
2
Specify address exceptions.
Managing the Machine
174
● Enter the MA
C address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add]. Allows communication
(received) only with devices having registered MAC addresses, and restricts communication with
devices with any other MAC addresses.
● You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.
Check for entry errors
● If MA
C addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the
Remote UI, in which case you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
<MAC Address
Filter>(P
. 243)
Deleting a MAC address from exceptions
● Select a MA
C address and click [Delete].
3
Click [OK].
Using the operation panel
● Y
ou can also enable or disable MAC address ltering from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<MAC Address
Filter>(P
. 243)
LINKS
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 171)
Managing the Machine
175
Changing Port Numbers
2JRY-047
Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other de
vices. Typically, conventional port numbers are used for
major protocols, but devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are
well-known. To enhance security, your Network Administrator may change the port numbers. When a port number has
been changed, the new number must be shared with the communicating devices, such as computers and servers.
Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.
● T
o change the port number for proxy server, see
Setting a Proxy(P. 177) .
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Network Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
<Port Number Settings>.
4
Selecting the protocol of which you want to change the port number.
Learning more about the protocols
● <LPD>/<RA
W>/<WSD Multicast Discovery>
Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD Functions(P. 37)
● <HTTP>
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 195)
● <SNMP> Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 54)
5
Enter the port number, and select <Apply>.
● On ho
w to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 83) .
LINKS
Conguring Printer Ports
(P. 39)
Managing the Machine
176
Setting a Proxy
2JRY-048
A pr
oxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other
devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The
client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the
resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of trac between in-house and outside networks
but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When you use
Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy, make
sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and
password for authentication.
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
4
Click [Edit] in [Proxy Settings].
5
Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use Proxy]
Select the check box to use the specied proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.
[HTTP Proxy Server Address]
Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.
[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]
Change the port number as necessary.
[Use Proxy within Same Domain]
Managing the Machine
177
Select the check box to also use the specied pr
oxy server for communication with devices in the same
domain.
[Use Proxy Authentication]
To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the
user name in the [User Name] text box.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and
enter alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.
6
Click [OK].
LINKS
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 157)
Managing the Machine
178
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS
2JRY-049
Y
ou can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer by using Transport Layer
Security (TLS). TLS is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. TLS must be enabled when
the Remote UI is used for specifying settings such as SNMPv3. To use TLS encrypted communication for the Remote
UI, you need to specify a "key and certicate" (server certicate) you want to use before enabling TLS. Generate or
install the key and certicate for TLS before enabling TLS (
Management Functions(P. 332) ).
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
4
Click [Key and Certicate] in [TLS Settings].
5
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certicate you want to use.
Viewing details of a certicate
● You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text link
under [Key Name], or the certicate icon.
6
Enable TLS for the Remote UI.
1
Click [Security Settings]
[Remote UI Settings].
2
Click [Edit].
3
Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [OK].
Managing the Machine
179
Using the operation panel
● Y
ou can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<Use
TLS>
(P. 242)
Starting the Remote UI with TLS
● If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the
security certicate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address eld, and then proceed
to display the Remote UI screen.
Starting Remote UI(P. 198)
LINKS
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 54)
Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication
(P. 181)
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)
(P. 184)
Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication
(P. 187)
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P
. 189)
Managing the Machine
180
Generating the Key and Certicate for Network
Communication
2JRY-04A
A k
ey and certicate can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via
Transport Layer Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Self-signed certicates
are used with the key and certicate generated in "Network Communication."
● If you want to use a server certicate that has a CA signatur
e, you can generate a CSR together with a key
instead of a certicate.
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)
(P. 184)
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].
4
Click [Generate Key].
Deleting a registered key and certicate
● Click [Delete] on the right of the k
ey and certicate you want to delete
click [OK].
● A
key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" is
displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the other key and certicate
before deleting it.
5
Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].
6
Specify settings for the key and certicate.
Managing the Machine
181
[Ke
y Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later in a
list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the drop-
down list. In either case, the larger the number for the key length is, the higher the security level
becomes. However, the communication speed becomes slower.
● When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signatur
e Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the
key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].
[Certicate Settings]
[V
alidity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity start date of the certicate, in the order of: year, month, day.
[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity end date of the certicate, in the order of: year, month, day. A date earlier than
[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
7
Click [OK].
Managing the Machine
182
● Gener
ating a key and certicate may take some time.
● After the key and certicate is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.
LINKS
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 179)
Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication
(P. 187)
Managing the Machine
183
Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)
2JRY-04C
Because certicates gener
ated on the machine do not have a CA signature, a communication error may result
depending on devices it communicates with. To have the certicate authority issue the certicate with the CA
signature, you need to obtain data of CSR (Certicate Signing Request), which the administrator can generate from
Remote UI. When the certicate is issued, register it in the key with the CSR generated.
Generating a Key and CSR(P. 184)
Registering a Certicate to a Ke
y(P. 186)
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
Generating a Key and CSR
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].
4
Click [Generate Key].
Deleting a registered key and certicate
● Click [Delete] on the right of the k
ey and certicate you want to delete
click [OK].
● A
key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" is
displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and certicate before
deleting it.
5
Select [Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].
6
Specify settings for the key and CSR.
Managing the Machine
184
[Ke
y Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later in a
list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the drop-
down list. In any case, the larger the number for the key length, the slower the communication.
However, the security is tighter.
● When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signatur
e Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the
key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].
[Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] r
adio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
7
Click [OK].
● Gener
ating a key and CSR may take some time.
8
Click [Store in File].
● A dialog bo
x for storing the le appears. Choose where to store the le and click [Save].
Managing the Machine
185
➠ The CSR le is stor
ed on the computer.
9
Attach the stored le and submit the application to the certication authority
.
Registering a Certicate to a Ke
y
The key with the CSR generated cannot be used until the certicate issued from the certicate authority based on the
CSR is registered in the key. Once the certication authority has issued the certicate, register it using the procedure
below.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Security Settings]
[Key and Certicate Settings].
4
Click [Key Name] or [Certicate] r
equired to register the certicate.
5
Click [Register Certicate].
6
Click [Browse], specify the le for the certicate signing r
equest, and click [Register].
LINKS
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 179)
Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication
(P. 181)
Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication
(P. 187)
Managing the Machine
186
Registering the Key and Certicate for Network
Communication
2JRY-04E
Y
ou can obtain the key and certicate, and the CA certicate from a certication authority (CA) for use with the
machine. Install and register the obtained key and certicate le and CA certicate le in this machine using Remote
UI. Check the key and certicate, and CA certicate conditions that are required for the machine in advance (
Management Functions(P. 332) ).
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate Settings].
● Click [Ke
y and Certicate Settings] to install a key and certicate, or [CA Certicate Settings] to install a CA
certicate.
4
Click [Register Key and Certicate] or [Register CA Certicate].
Deleting a registered key and certicate or CA certicate
● Click
[Delete] on the right of the key and certicate or CA certicate you want to delete
click
[OK]. You
cannot delete the preinstalled CA certicates.
● A key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" is
displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and certicate before
deleting it.
Disabling or enabling the preinstalled CA certicates
● Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certicate you want to disable. To enable the certicate
again, click [Enable] on the right of the certicate.
5
Click [Install].
Managing the Machine
187
Deleting the key and certicate le or CA certicate le
● Click [Delete] on the right of the le you want to delete click [OK].
6
Click [Browse], specify the le to install, and click [Start Installation].
➠ The k
ey and certicate le or the CA certicate le is installed on the machine from a computer.
7
Register the key and certicate or CA certicate.
Registering a key and certicate
1
Click [Register] on the right of the key and certicate le you want to r
egister.
2
Enter the name of the key and password.
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric char
acters for the name of the key to be registered.
[Password]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the le to be registered.
3
Click [OK].
Registering a CA certicate
Click [Register] on the right of the CA certicate le you want to r
egister.
LINKS
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 179)
Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication
(P. 181)
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P
. 189)
Managing the Machine
188
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings
2JRY-04F
The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client de
vice. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server
(authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a
device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that
the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server,
which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails,
a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.
IEEE 802.1X Authentication Method
Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key and certicate or
a CA certicate befor
e conguring IEEE 802.1X authentication (
Registering the Key and Certicate for
Network Communication
(P. 187) ).
TLS
The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other b
y mutually verifying their certicates. A
key and certicate issued by a certication authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when
authenticating the machine). For the server authentication, a CA certicate installed via the Remote UI can be
used in addition to a CA certicate preinstalled in the machine.
TTLS
This authentication method uses a user name and passwor
d for the client authentication and a CA certicate
for the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used
with PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method (
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 179) ).
PEAP
The r
equired settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MSCHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol.
Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method (
Conguring the Ke
y and
Certicate for TLS(P. 179) ).
● For mor
e information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P
. 198)
Managing the Machine
189
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Select [Network Settings] [IEEE 802.1X Settings].
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, and enter the login name in the [Login Name]
te
xt box.
[Use IEEE 802.1X]
Select the check bo
x to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
[Login Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.
6
Congure the r
equired settings according to the specied authentication method.
Setting TLS
1
Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certicate].
2
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certicate you want to use for the client
authentication.
Viewing details of a certicate
● Y
ou can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon.
Managing the Machine
190
Setting TTLS/PEAP
1
Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.
Internal protocol for TTLS
● Y
ou can select [MSCHAPv2] or [PAP].
2
Click [Change User Name/Password].
● T
o specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check
box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.
3
Set the user name/password.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric char
acters for the user name.
[Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the new
password both in the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes.
4
Click [OK].
7
Click [OK].
8
Restart the machine.
● T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Managing the Machine
191
Using the operation panel
● Y
ou can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<IEEE 802.1X
Settings>(P
. 222)
LINKS
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 179)
Managing the Machine
192
Restricting the Machine's Functions
2JRY-04H
Some of the functions of the machine may r
arely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes,
the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.
Restricting USB Functions
The USB connection allows an easy connection with peripheral devices, but it may cause a security risk such as
an information leakage. Y
ou can restrict a USB connection with a computer.
Restricting USB
Functions
(P. 194)
Disabling HTTP Communication
When not performing operations via the network, for example, when using the machine via USB connection,
you can disable HT
TP communication to prevent a hacking via the HTTP port.
Disabling HTTP
Communication
(P. 195)
Disabling Remote Management
When not using Remote UI, you can disable functions to prevent an unauthorized remote operation via Remote
UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 196)
Managing the Machine
193
Restricting USB Functions
2JRY-04J
USB is a convenient way of connecting peripher
al devices and storing or relocating data, but USB can also be a source
of information leakage if it is not properly managed. This section describes how to restrict connection via the USB port
of the machine.
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer(P. 194)
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer
You can disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer. If this port is disabled, the
machine cannot communicate with a computer via USB.
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Use as USB Device> <Off> Restart the machine
Managing the Machine
194
Disabling HTTP Communication
2JRY-04K
HT
TP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you
are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party
intrusions via the unused HTTP port.
● Disabling HT
TP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing, and printing
with Google Cloud Print.
<Menu> <Network Settings> <TCP/IP Settings> <Use HTTP> <Off> <Yes>
LINKS
Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD Functions(P. 37)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 157)
Changing Port Numbers(P. 176)
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 197)
Managing the Machine
195
Disabling Remote UI
2JRY-04L
The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specied b
y using a Web browser on a computer. To use
the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If the machine is connected to a
computer via USB, or if you do not need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the
risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties.
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings> <Use Remote UI> <Off>
LINKS
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 195)
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 197)
Managing the Machine
196
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)
2JRY-04R
Using a W
eb browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the
status of the machine. You can also make various settings. You can do this without leaving your desk, making system
management easier. For more information about the system requirements for the Remote UI, see
System
Envir
onment(P. 333) .
Functions of the Remote UI
Checking the Status and Logs(P. 201)
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205)
Basics of the Remote UI
Starting Remote UI(P. 198)
Managing the Machine
197
Starting Remote UI
2JRY-04S
T
o operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI.
Check the IP address set to the machine in advance (
Viewing Network Settings(P. 34) ). If you have any questions,
ask your Network Administr
ator.
1
Start the Web browser.
2
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address eld, and pr
ess the
[ENTER] key.
● If you want to use an IPv6 addr
ess, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://
[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
If a security alert is displayed
● A
security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted (
Conguring
the
Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 179) ). When certicate settings or TLS settings have no errors, continue
browsing the Web site.
3
Log in to the Remote UI.
When a System Manager PIN is not set
Select [System Manager Mode] or [Gener
al User Mode].
[System Manager Mode]
You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings.
[General User Mode]
You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. When
you want to check if a specic document of yours is in the print queue or cancel the printing of a document
of yours in the print queue, enter the user name of the document in [User Name]. The user name is
automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or computer login
name.
[Remote UI Access PIN]
If [Remote UI Access PIN] is set, enter the PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 166)
Managing the Machine
198
When a System Manager PIN is set
Enter the appr
opriate PIN in [System Manager PIN] to log in to System Manager Mode.
Setting the
System Manager PIN
(P. 164)
4
Click [Log In].
➠ The Portal page (main page) will be displayed.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
Remote UI Screen
When you log in to the Remote UI, the follo
wing Portal page appears. This section describes the items displayed on
the Portal page and the basic operations.
[Device Basic Information]
Displays the curr
ent status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the
Error Information page will be displayed.
[Consumables Information]
Displays information about consumables.
[Support Link]
Displays the support link specied in [De
vice Information] under [System Management].
Managing the Machine
199
Refresh Icon
Refr
eshes the currently displayed page.
[Log Out]
Logs off fr
om the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.
[Mail to System Manager]
Displays a windo
w for creating an e-mail to the system manager specied in [System Manager Information]
under [System Management].
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Displays the [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. For any of the waiting documents, you can check the status/
history or cancel the pr
ocessing.
[Settings/Registration]
Displays [Settings/Registr
ation] page. When you have logged in to System Manager Mode, you can change
the settings items and save/load the registered data.
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 205)
Managing the Machine
200
Checking the Status and Logs
2JRY-04U
Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 201)
Checking History of Documents(P. 202)
Checking Error Information(P. 202)
Checking Consumables(P. 202)
Checking Device Specications(P
. 203)
Checking System Manager Information(P. 203)
Checking Print Total Counter(P. 204)
Checking Eco Information(P. 204)
● A le name of a document may not be displayed in full. The printed application name may be added to the
le name.
Checking Current Status of Print Documents
The list of the documents curr
ently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 198) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status]
● Y
ou can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].
● If you logged on in System Manager Mode, all the print documents curr
ently printing and waiting to
be printed will be listed.
● If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only
be displayed on the documents that you printed.
● Click [Job Number] on the paused documents to display detailed information. You can check the user
name and the page count of the printed document.
Managing the Machine
201
Checking History of Documents
The history of print is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 198) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Log]
Checking Error Information
When an err
or occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on the
Portal page (main page).
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 198) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Error
Information]
Checking Consumables
Paper size and paper type for the paper source, toner cartridge model number, etc. are displayed. You can also click
[Check Consumables Details] in the Portal page (main page) to display this page ( Remote UI Screen(P. 199) ).
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 198) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Consumables]
Managing the Machine
202
Checking Device Specications
The maximum print speed is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 198) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device
Featur
es]
Checking System Manager Information
Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. This information is set in [System Management]
on the [Settings/Registr
ation] page.
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 198) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device
Information]
Managing the Machine
203
Checking Print Total Counter
The total number of pages that have been printed by the copy and print functions is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 198) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Check
Counter]
Checking Eco Information
Y
ou can check information such as the number of printouts per month and amount of consumed power. Also, you can
check and change the copy settings of the device to save paper and energy.
Log in to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 198) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Eco
Information]
LINKS
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
Managing the Machine
204
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
2JRY-04W
Y
ou can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the
machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI. This section describes the basic ow of changing the
settings of the machine using the Remote UI.
● Some settings can only be changed when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.
● Some settings may r
equire operations that differ from the procedure described here.
1
Start the Remote UI.
Starting Remote UI(P. 198)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Remote UI Screen(P. 199)
3
Click the setting you want to congur
e in the menu on the left side of the screen.
4
Click the link to display the desired page as necessary.
5
Click [Edit].
Managing the Machine
205
6
Specify the required settings.
7
Click [OK].
8
Restart the machine as necessary.
● T
urn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Managing the Machine
206
● For information about whether you need to r
estart the machine, view the message on the edit screen.
Managing the Machine
207
Updating the Firmware
2JRY-04X
For the rmwar
e, select the method of update depending on the installation condition of the machine. There are two
methods of update: the one is to access the latest rmware version on the Internet from the machine and perform the
update if the version currently installed in the machine is not the latest, and the other is to access the latest rmware
version on the Internet from a computer and perform the update from the computer if the version currently installed
in the machine is not the latest. In an environment where connection to the Internet cannot be established via a
wireless LAN, establish connection via a wired LAN or USB and perform the update from the computer.
Installation Condition of the Machine How to Install the Update
Wireless LAN connection Updating via the Internet(P. 208)
Wired LAN connection Updating via the Internet(P. 208)
Updating from a Computer(P. 209)
USB connection Updating from a Computer(P. 209)
● If you ar
e in an IPv6 environment, you cannot perform rmware update. Use USB to re-establish connection,
and perform the update from the computer.
Checking the rmwar
e version
● You can check the rmware version from the operation panel of the machine. After completion of the
rmware update operation, make sure that the update was performed correctly.
Checking the Firmware
V
ersion(P. 209)
Updating via the Internet
Y
ou can access the Canon server from the machine to update the rmware to the latest version.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <System Management Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <Update Firmware>.
4
Select <Via Internet>.
➠ A check for e
xistence of the latest rmware is performed.
Managing the Machine
208
● If the <This is the latest rmwar
e version.> message is displayed, there is no need to update the rmware.
5
Check the message and select <Yes>.
6
When a license screen appears, press
.
7
Select <OK>.
➠ When the rmwar
e update is complete, the machine restarts automatically.
● Do not turn OFF the machine while the r
estart is in progress.
Updating from a Computer
When you have do
wnloaded the latest rmware version from the Canon website, use "User Support Tool" utility
software to update the rmware from a computer. For how to perform rmware update from a computer, see the
"User Support Tool Operation Guide" included with the rmware.
To Put the Machine into a Firmware Update Waiting State
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Update Firmware> <Via PC> <Yes>
Checking the Firmware Version
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <System Management Settings>.
● If the scr
een for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
3
Select <Update Firmware>.
4
Select <Version Information>.
➠ The curr
ent rmware version is displayed.
Managing the Machine
209
Initializing Settings
2JRY-04Y
You can restore the following settings:
Initializing Eco Report Counter(P. 210)
Initializing Menu(P. 210)
Initializing Key and Certicate(P
. 210)
Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 211)
Initializing Eco Report Counter
You can restore the Eco Report Counter settings to the factory defaults.
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Initialize Eco Report Counter> <Yes>
Initializing Menu
You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setting Menu List(P. 213) ). Depending on the settings selected, you
may need to r
estart the machine after initialization.
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Initialize Menu> Select the item you want to
initialize <Yes> Restart the machine if necessary
● Y
ou can restore the settings only for <Network Settings>.
<Menu>
<Network Settings> <Initialize Network Settings> <Yes> Restart the machine
Initializing Key and Certicate
Y
ou can restore the settings of the key and certicate and the CA certicate. Note that all the keys and certicates and
CA certicates that you registered in the machine (except the preinstalled keys and CA certicates) will be deleted after
initializing.
Managing the Machine
210
● After initializing, functions that r
equire a key and certicate such as TLS encrypted communication are not
available. To use these functions, congure the settings for the key and certicate and activate the functions
again.
Log in to the Remote UI with Administrator privileges ( Starting Remote UI(P. 198) ) [Settings/
Registr
ation]
[Initialize Setting Information] [Initialize Key and Certicate] [Initialize] [OK]
Initializing All Data/Settings
This enables r
estoration of all data and machine settings, including logs, to the factory default values. This prevents
sensitive data from being leaked when replacing or disposing of the machine. When the initialization process nishes,
the machine automatically restarts.
● Befor
e initializing, make sure that there are no documents being processed or waiting to be processed.
These documents will be deleted when initialization is performed.
● To use the machine after initializing it, you need to congure all settings from the beginning.
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Initialize All Data/Settings> <Yes> <Yes>
LINKS
Conguring the Ke
y and Certicate for TLS(P. 179)
Managing the Machine
211
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List ...........................................................................................................................................
213
<Network Settings> .......................................................................................................................................... 214
<Preferences> .................................................................................................................................................... 223
<Timer Settings> ............................................................................................................................................... 227
<Copy Settings> ................................................................................................................................................. 231
<Scan Settings> ................................................................................................................................................. 233
<Printer Settings> ............................................................................................................................................. 234
<Adjustment/Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................. 236
<System Management Settings> ...................................................................................................................... 241
Setting Menu List
212
Setting Menu List
2JRY-050
Y
ou can customize the machine based on your environment and needs by conguring settings described in this
chapter. To start conguration, select <Menu> on the Home screen (
Home Screen(P. 78) ). This section describes
what each item in the setting menu can congur
e.
● Y
ou can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings:
Printing Lists of
Settings(P
. 266)
Setting Menu List
213
<Network Settings>
2JRY-051
All the settings r
elated to the network are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
<Select Wired/Wireless LAN>(P. 214)
<Wireless LAN Settings>(P. 214)
<Direct Connection Settings>(P. 215)
<Easy Connection via PC> (P. 216)
<TCP/IP Settings> (P. 217)
<SNMP Settings>(P. 220)
<Dedicated Port Settings> (P. 221)
<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>(P. 221)
<Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 222)
<IEEE 802.1X Settings>(P. 222)
<Initialize Network Settings>(P. 222)
Asterisks (
*
)
● Settings mark
ed with an asterisk (
*
) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using or other
setting items.
<Select Wired/Wireless LAN>
When switching the machine fr
om Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when
switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using
the following <Wireless LAN Settings>).
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 13)
<Wired LAN>
<Wireless LAN>
<Wireless LAN Settings>
Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN. You can also view the current settings or specify the
setting for saving power consumption.
<SSID Settings>
Select to congur
e a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by
inputting manually from the operation panel.
<Select Access Point>
Wireless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list.
You must manually enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting
a Wir
eless Router(P. 21)
<Enter Manually>
Select to congure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID. By using this method, you can specify
authentication and encryption settings in detail.
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed
Settings
(P. 23)
<Security Settings>
Setting Menu List
214
<None>
<WEP>
<Open System>
WEP Key 1 to 4
<Shar
ed Key>
WEP Key 1 to 4
<WPA/WPA2-PSK>
<Auto>
<AES-CCMP>
<WPS Push Button Mode>
Select to automatically congure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router. Setting
Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 17)
<WPS PIN Code Mode>
Select to congure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router. Setting Up
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 19)
<Power Save Mode>
Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Wireless LAN Settings> Read the displayed message
<OK> <Power Save Mode> Select <Off> or <On>
<Wir
eless LAN Information>
Select to view the current wireless LAN settings. Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)
<MAC Address>
<Wireless LAN Status>
<Latest Error Information>
<Channel>
<SSID Settings>
<Security Settings>
<Power Save Mode>
<Direct Connection Settings>
Set whether to connect dir
ectly. By enabling this function, connecting directly with the machine is possible even in an
environment without an access point or wireless LAN router.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 142)
<Use Direct Connection>
<Off>
<On>
<Direct Connection Only>
*
<Wireless LAN/Direct Conn. (Auto Switch)>
*
Setting Menu List
215
<Time Until Direct Connection Termination>
Specify the time to automatically disconnect after Direct Connection is established.
0 (Do not terminate session automatically)
1 to 10 to 60 (min.)
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> <Time Until Direct Connection
T
ermination>
Enter the time
<Access Point Mode Settings>
Congure the SSID/network k
ey arbitrarily. If you want to connect multiple mobile devices to the machine at the
same time, you need to congure both SSID and network key arbitrarily.
<Use Custom SSID>
<Off>
<On>
<SSID>
<Use Custom Network Ke
y>
<Off>
<On>
<Network Key>
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> <Access Point Mode
Settings> <Use Custom SSID>/<Use Custom Network Key> <On> Enter the SSID/network
k
ey
<Apply>
<Easy Connection via PC>
Start Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode). This allo
ws you to use Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility on
your PC to congure network settings.
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Easy Connection via PC> Start connecting
● "Canon Laser NW De
vice Setup Utility" is available on the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).
Setting Menu List
216
<TCP/IP Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.
<IPv4 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.
<IP Addr
ess Settings>
Congure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a TCP/IP
network.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 28)
<Auto Acquire>
<Select Pr
otocol>
<Off>
<DHCP>
<BOOTP>
<RARP>
<Auto IP>
<Off>
<On>
<Manually Acquire>
<IP Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Subnet Mask>: 0.0.0.0
<Gateway Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Check Settings>
<Auto Acquire>
*
<IP Address>
<Subnet Mask>
<Gateway Address>
<PING Command>
Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer o
ver a network.
Testing the Network
Connection
(P. 29)
<DNS Settings>
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Conguring DNS(P
. 51)
<DNS Server Settings>
<Primary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
<Secondary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
<DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
<DNS Dynamic Update Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dyn. Updt. Intrvl.>
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
Setting Menu List
217
<DHCP Option Settings>
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquir
e the
host name and to use the dynamic update function.
Conguring DNS
(P. 51)
<Acquire Host Name>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update>
<Off>
<On>
<IPv6 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network.
<Use IPv6>
Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine. You can also view the current settings. Setting IPv6
Addresses(P. 31)
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Link-Local Addr
ess>
<Prex Length>
<Stateless Address Settings>
Enable or disable stateless addr
esses.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Stateless Addr
ess>
<Prex Length>
<Use DHCPv6>
Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 31)
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Stateful Addr
ess>
<Prex Length>
<DNS Settings>
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which pr
ovides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Conguring DNS(P
. 51)
<DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings>
Setting Menu List
218
<Use IPv4 Host/Domain>
<Off>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Manual Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Stateful Addr
ess>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Stateless Addr
ess>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Interval>
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
<LPD Print Settings>
Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system.
Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD Functions(P. 37)
<Off>
<On>
<RAW Print Settings>
Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specic printing pr
otocol.
Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD
Functions(P. 37)
<Off>
<On>
<WSD Settings>
Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer or scanner by using the WSD
protocol. Conguring Printing Pr
otocols and WSD Functions(P. 37)
<WSD Print Settings>
<Use WSD Print>
<Off>
<On>
<Use WSD Browsing>
<Off>
<On>
<WSD Scan Settings>
<Use WSD Scan>
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
219
<Use Computer Scan>
<Off>
<On>
<Use Multicast Disco
very>
<Off>
<On>
<Use HTTP>
Enable or disable HTTP, which is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote
UI, WSD printing, or printing with Google Cloud Print. Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 195)
<Off>
<On>
<Port Number Settings>
Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment. Changing Port Numbers(P. 176)
<LPD>
1 to 515 to 65535
<RA
W>
1 to 9100
to 65535
<WSD Multicast Disco
very>
1 to 3702
to 65535
<HT
TP>
1 to 80
to 65535
<SNMP>
1 to 161 to 65535
<MTU Size>
Select the maximum size of packets the machine receives. Changing the Maximum Transmission
Unit(P
. 49)
<1300>
<1400>
<1500>
<SNMP Settings>
Specify the settings for monitoring and contr
olling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software.
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 54)
<SNMPv1 Settings>
Enable or disable SNMPv1. When enabling SNMPv1, specify a community name and access privileges to
Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
220
<Menu> <Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv1 Settings> Select <Off> or <On>
<SNMPv3 Settings>
Enable or disable SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when SNMPv3 is
enabled.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv3 Settings> Select <Off> or <On>
<Acquir
e Printer Mngt. Info. from Host>
Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running
SNMP-compatible softwar
e.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <Acquire Printer Mngt. Info. from
Host> Select <Off> or <On>
<Dedicated Port Settings>
Enable or disable the dedicated port. The dedicated port is used when printing or scanning uses MF Scan Utility and
when br
owsing or specifying the machine settings over the network.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Dedicated Port Settings> Select <Off> or <On>
<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>
Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network envir
onment.
Setting a
W
ait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 50)
0
to 300 (sec.)
Setting Menu List
221
<Ethernet Driver Settings>
Select the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) and the communication mode of Ethernet (half-duplex/full-duplex).
You can also view the MAC address for wired LAN.
<Auto Detect>
Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type.
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P
. 47)
<Off>
<Communication Mode>
<Half Duplex>
<Full Duplex>
<Ethernet T
ype>
<10BASE-T>
<100BASE-TX>
<On>
<MAC Address>
Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device. Viewing
the MA
C Address for Wired LAN(P. 34)
<IEEE 802.1X Settings>
Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication. Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings
(P. 189)
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Network Settings> <IEEE 802.1X Settings> Select <Off> or <On> Restart the
machine
<Initialize Network Settings>
Select to r
eturn the Network Settings to the factory defaults.
<Initialize Menu>(P. 247)
Setting Menu List
222
<Preferences>
2JRY-052
All the settings r
elated to viewing of the display are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
(
).
Asterisks (
*
)
● Settings mark
ed with "
*1
" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country
or region.
● Settings marked with "
*2
" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using or other setting
items.
<Display Settings>
<Default Scr
een after Startup/Restoration>
By default, the Home screen is displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON or when the Auto Reset
function is performed. Specify the setting to change the default scr
een and display the main screen of a
different function.
<Home>
<Copy>
<Scan>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Default Screen after Startup/Restoration>
Select a function to display the desired screen
<Button Display Or
der on Home Screen>
Congure the settings for the buttons displayed in the Home scr
een. You can rearrange the order in which the
buttons appear.
Customizing the Home Screen(P. 100)
<Contr
ast>
Adjust the contrast (the difference between the light and dark parts) of the display to suit the installation
location of the machine.
Five Levels
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Contrast> Adjust the contrast
Setting Menu List
223
<Invert Screen Colors>
Select <On> to invert the display colors. Select <On> if the display is hard to view even after the brightness was
adjusted in <Contr
ast>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Invert Screen Colors> Select <Off> or <On>
<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch>
Select the unit of measurement.
<Millimeter>
<Inch>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch> Select
<Millimeter> or <Inch>
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>
Specify whether to display a message prompting you to check paper settings when loading paper into the
dr
awer.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Notify to Check Paper Settings> Select <Off>
or <On>
<Message Display Time>
Specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed.
1 to 2 to 5 (sec.)
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Message Display Time> Enter a number for
the interval
Setting Menu List
224
<Scrolling Speed>
Adjust the scrolling speed of the screen by selecting from three levels.
<Slow>
<Standar
d>
<Fast>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Scrolling Speed> Select the speed
<Language>
*1
Select the display language used for the display, reports, and lists.
<Arabic>
<Basque>
<Bulgarian>
<Catalan>
<Chinese (Simplied)>
<Chinese (T
raditional)>
<Croatian>
<Czech>
<Danish>
<Dutch>
<English>
<Estonian>
<Finnish>
<Fr
ench>
<German>
<Greek>
<Hungarian>
<Italian>
<Japanese>
<Korean>
<Latvian>
<Lithuanian>
<Norwegian>
<Polish>
<Portuguese>
<Romanian>
<Russian>
<Slovak>
<Slovene>
<Spanish>
<Swedish>
<Turkish>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Language> Select a language
Setting Menu List
225
<Remote UI Language>
*1*2
Select the display language used for the Remote UI screens.
<Chinese (Simplied)>
<Chinese (T
raditional)>
<Czech>
<Danish>
<Dutch>
<English>
<Finnish>
<Fr
ench>
<German>
<Hungarian>
<Italian>
<Japanese>
<Korean>
<Norwegian>
<Polish>
<Portuguese>
<Russian>
<Spanish>
<Swedish>
<Turkish>
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Remote UI Language> Select a language
Setting Menu List
226
<Timer Settings>
2JRY-053
All the settings r
elated to the timer are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
<Date/Time Settings>(P. 227)
<Auto Sleep Time>(P. 228)
<Auto Reset Time>(P. 229)
<Function After Auto Reset>(P. 229)
<Auto Oine Time>(P
. 229)
<Auto Shutdown Time>(P. 230)
Asterisks (
*
)
● Settings mark
ed with "
*1
" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country
or region.
● Settings marked with "
*2
" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using or other setting
items.
<Date/Time Settings>
*2
Specify date and time settings, including the date format and the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.
<Date Format>
*1
Select the date format (order of year, month, and day).
<YYYY MM/DD>
<MM/DD/YYYY>
<DD/MM YYYY>
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Date Format> Select the date format
<Time Format>
Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.
<12 Hour (AM/PM)>
<24 Hour>
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time Format> Select the display setting
Setting Menu List
227
<Current Date/Time Settings>
Set the current date and time. Setting the Date/Time(P. 9)
● Set <Time Zone> befor
e setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed, the
current date and time are also changed accordingly.
● The curr
ent date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time is in effect.
<Time Zone>
*1
Select the time zone. If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also
changed accor
dingly.
Setting the Date/Time(P. 9)
<(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West> to <(UTC) Coordinated Universal Time> to <(UTC+14:00)
Kiritimati Island>
UTC
● Coor
dinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks
and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.
<Daylight Saving Time Settings>
*1
Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to
which daylight saving time is in effect. Setting the Date/Time(P. 9)
<Off>
<On>
Start: Month, Week, Day
End: Month, W
eek, Day
<Auto Sleep Time>
If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to process for a specied period of time, the machine enters
sleep mode to save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed.
Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to
save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 102)
1 to 30 (min.)
Setting Menu List
228
<Auto Reset Time>
If a key is not pressed for a specied period of time, the scr
een and the settings are initialized to display the
default screen (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. The Auto Reset is not
performed in the following cases:
● The setting menu is displayed.
● The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents.
● An error message is displayed and the Error indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the
error does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function.)
0 (Auto Reset is disabled.)
1 to 2
to 9 (min.)
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Auto Reset Time> Specify the Auto Reset time
● The scr
een displayed after the Auto Reset is performed can be selected in <Function After Auto Reset>.
<Function After Auto Reset>
Select whether to r
eturn the display to the default screen after the Auto Reset is performed. If <Default Function> is
selected, the main screen of the function selected in <Default Screen after Startup/Restoration> is displayed (
<Default Screen after Startup/Restoration>(P. 223) ). If <Selected Function> is selected, the display r
eturns to the
main screen of the function that was selected.
<Default Function>
<Selected Function>
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Function After Auto Reset> Select <Default Function> or
<Selected Function>
<Auto Oine Time>
If scan is not performed within a specied period of time after the scr
een below is displayed (the machine is set online
for scanning), the machine automatically becomes oine. Specify the time period at which the machine becomes
oine. You can also set the machine to remain online.
Setting Menu List
229
0 (The machine remains online.)
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Auto Oine Time> Set the time period
<Auto Shutdown Time>
*1
Set a timer to automatically shut down the machine after a specied period of idle time has elapsed since the
machine enter
ed the sleep mode.
0 (Auto Shutdown is disabled.)
1 to 4
to 8 (hr.)
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Auto Shutdown Time> Set the Auto Shutdown time
● If any settings of the [Timer Settings] ar
e changed from the Remote UI while the machine is in the sleep
mode, the timer for the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is reset to the beginning. The machine automatically
shuts down after a specied period of idle time has elapsed since the timer was reset.
Setting Menu List
230
<Copy Settings>
2JRY-054
All the settings r
elated to the copy are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
<Change Default Settings>(P. 231)
<Correct Density>(P. 232)
<Initialize Default Settings>(P. 232)
<Change Default Settings>
Y
ou can change the default settings about copy. The selected settings are used as the default settings of the copy
function.
Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 101)
<Number of Copies>
1 to 999
<Density>
Nine Le
vels
<Auto Density>
<Original Type>
<Text>
<Text/Photo (High Speed)>
<Text/Photo>
<Photo>
<Cop
y Ratio>
<Custom Ratio>
<100% (1:1)>
<400% (Max)>
<200%>
<141% A5->A4>
<70% A4->A5>
<50%>
<25% (Min)>
<N on 1>
<Off>
<2 on 1>
<4 on 1>
<ID Car
d Copy>
<Select Layout>
<Collate>
<Off>
<On>
<Sharpness>
Setting Menu List
231
Seven Levels
<Correct Density>
Specify the initial copy density. You can also change the copy density temporarily. Basic Copy Operations(P. 105)
Nine Levels
<Menu> <Copy Settings> <Correct Density> Adjust the density
<Initialize Default Settings>
Select to r
estore the default copy settings.
<Menu> <Copy Settings> <Initialize Default Settings> <Yes>
Setting Menu List
232
<Scan Settings>
2JRY-055
All the settings r
elated to the scan are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
Asterisks (
*
)
● Settings mark
ed with an asterisk (
*
) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using or other
setting items.
<Shortcut Key Settings>
Register scan settings for the <Scan -> PC1> and <Scan -> PC2>. The settings include the computer that scanned
images ar
e saved in, the type of scan (color or black and white), and the le format (PDF or JPEG). Registering these
settings enables you to scan documents into a specied computer just by selecting a shortcut key. You can view the
registered settings by selecting <Conrm Destination>.
Scanning Using the Shortcut Key(P. 130)
<Register>
<Scan -> PC1>
<Off>
<USB Connection>
<Color Scan>
<Black & White Scan>
<Custom 1>
<Custom 2>
<Network Connection>
*
<Color Scan>
<Black & White Scan>
<Custom 1>
<Custom 2>
<Scan -> PC2>
<Off>
<USB Connection>
<Color Scan>
<Black & White Scan>
<Custom 1>
<Custom 2>
<Network Connection>
*
<Color Scan>
<Black & White Scan>
<Custom 1>
<Custom 2>
<Conrm Destination>
<Scan -> PC1>
<Scan -> PC2>
Setting Menu List
233
<Printer Settings>
2JRY-056
All the settings r
elated to the printer are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger (
).
<Action When Paper Size Mismatch>(P. 234)
<Image Quality Settings for Mobile Print>(P. 234)
<Print Quality>(P. 235)
Asterisks (
*
)
● Settings mark
ed with an asterisk (
*
) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using or other
setting items.
Priority of settings
● If a print setting is specied both from the printer driver and the operation panel of the machine, the
specication from the printer driver overrides that from the operation panel. The specication from the
operation panel becomes effective in some specic cases, such as when printing from UNIX or other
operating system that does not support printer drivers.
<Action When Paper Size Mismatch>
Set whether printing goes ahead if a paper size other than the size loaded in the dr
awer is selected. You can also set
the machine not to go ahead with printing and instead display an alert message.
<Force Output>
<Display Err
or>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Action When Paper Size Mismatch> Select <Force Output> or
<Display Err
or>
<Image Quality Settings for Mobile Print>
*
Select the image pr
ocessing when printing from a mobile device.
<Halftone>
<Gr
adation>
<Error Diffusion>
<Priority>
<Standar
d>
<Speed Priority>
Setting Menu List
234
<Image Quality Priority>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Image Quality Settings for Mobile Print> Select <Halftone> or
<Priority> Select the item <Apply>
● When <Priority> is set to <Standar
d> or <Speed Priority>, you cannot select <Error Diffusion>.
<Print Quality>
Y
ou can change settings related to print quality.
<Toner Save>
You can save toner consumption when printing from a mobile device. Select <On> when you want to check the
layout or other appearance characteristics before proceeding to nal printing of a large job.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Toner Save> Select <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
235
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
2JRY-057
All the settings r
elated to adjustment and maintenance are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a
dagger (
).
<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.> (P. 236)
<Toner Save>(P. 236)
<Special Processing>(P. 236)
<Clean Fixing Assembly> (P. 240)
<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>
Set the display timing for the message notifying you that the amount r
emaining in the toner cartridges or the drum
cartridges is low.
<Toner Cartridge>
<Drum Cartridge>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.> Select <Toner
Cartridge> or <Drum Cartridge> Enter the cartridge level
<Toner Save>
Select whether to r
educe toner consumption when copying.
<Copy>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Toner Save> <Copy> <On>
● Fine lines and portions with lighter print density may be blurr
ed when you set this to <On>.
<Special Processing>
If the print r
esults on special types of paper are not satisfactory, the following settings may improve the quality of the
printouts.
Setting Menu List
236
<Special Printing Mode U>
Sometimes toner appears splattered around text or patterns in a printout. In such cases, setting this to <On>
may impr
ove the quality of the printout.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode U>
<On>
● Setting this to <On> may affect the print quality for some types of paper (especially for lightweight
paper) or in some printing envir
onments (especially in high humidity environments).
● When you set this to <On>, <Special Printing Mode Q>, <Special Printing Mode R>, and <Special
Printing Mode T> are set to <Off> automatically.
<Special Printing Mode A>
If streaks adhere to the print paper, changing this may improve the print quality. <Mode 2> can improve the
quality mor
e signicantly than <Mode 1>.
<Off>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode A>
Select the mode
<Special Printing Mode Z>
If streaks adhere to the print paper output when copying, changing this may improve the print quality. <Mode
2> can impr
ove the quality more signicantly than <Mode 1>.
<Off>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode Z>
Select the mode
Setting Menu List
237
<Special Printing Mode G>
Printed images may fade or streaks may appear when the paper has a lot of paper dust. In such cases, setting
this to <On> may impr
ove the quality of the printout.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode G>
<On>
<Special Printing Mode Q>
Printed images may be faint when they are printed on rough-surface paper. In such cases, setting this to <On>
may impr
ove the quality of the printout.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode Q>
<On>
● Setting this to <On> may affect the image quality
.
● When you set this to <On>, <Special Printing Mode U>, <Special Printing Mode R>, and <Special
Printing Mode T> are set to <Off> automatically.
<Special Printing Mode R>
Printing may be faint when you print on the back of a printed sheet. In such cases, setting this to <On> may
impr
ove the quality of the printout.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode R>
<On>
● If you set to <On>, image quality may be affected or a paper jam may occur when a certain length of
time elapses after printing on the fr
ont side or depending on the ambient humidity.
Setting Menu List
238
● When you set this to <On>, <Special Printing Mode U>, <Special Printing Mode Q>, and <Special
Printing Mode T> ar
e set to <Off> automatically.
<Special Printing Mode T>
Printing may be uneven when you print in a high-humidity environment. In such cases, setting this to <On> may
impr
ove the quality of the printout.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode T>
<On>
● Printed images or te
xt may be blurred when you set this to <On> and print in a low-humidity
environment.
● When you set this to <On>, <Special Printing Mode U>, <Special Printing Mode Q>, and <Special
Printing Mode R> are set to <Off> automatically.
<Special Printing Mode L>
Smudges may appear in a printout when the paper has a lot of paper dust or other dust particles. In such cases,
setting this to <On> may impr
ove the quality of the printout.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode L>
<On>
<Select Line Width>
If a printed barcode cannot be read, changing this may resolve the problem.
<Auto>
<Thin>
<Slightly Thin>
<Slightly Thick>
<Thick>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Select Line Width> Select the
line width
Setting Menu List
239
<Clean Fixing Assembly>
Clean the xing assembly after the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge is replaced or if black streaks appear on
printouts. Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 254)
Setting Menu List
240
<System Management Settings>
2JRY-058
All the settings r
elated to System Management Settings are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a
dagger (
).
<Network Settings>(P. 241)
<System Manager Information Settings> (P. 241)
<Device Information Settings> (P. 242)
<Security Settings>(P. 242)
<Select Country/Region>(P. 243)
<Remote UI Settings>(P. 244)
<Auto Online for Remote Scan>(P. 244)
<Display Job Log> (P. 245)
<Use as USB Device>(P. 245)
<Enable Product Extended Survey Program> (P. 245)
<Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)>/<Display Consumables Info. (Toner Status)>(P. 245)
<Google Cloud Print Settings>(P. 246)
<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>(P. 246)
<Update Firmware>(P. 247)
<Initialize Eco Report Counter>(P. 247)
<Initialize Menu>(P. 247)
<Initialize All Data/Settings>(P. 247)
Asterisks (
*
)
● Settings mark
ed with "
*1
" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country
or region.
● Settings marked with "
*2
" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using or other setting
items.
<Network Settings>
*2
See
<Network Settings>(P. 214) .
<System Manager Information Settings>
Specify the PIN e
xclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to <Network Settings> and <System
Management Settings>. You can set the PIN from <System Manager PIN>. You can also register the name of an
Administrator.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 164)
<System Manager PIN>
Enter a number for the System Manager PIN.
<System Manager Name>
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator.
Setting Menu List
241
<Device Information Settings>
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine.
<Device Name>
<Location>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Device Information Settings> Select <Device
Name> or <Location> Enter the device name or location ( Entering Text(P. 83) ) <Apply>
<Security Settings>
*2
Enable or disable settings for IP addr
ess or MAC address packet ltering.
<Use TLS>
Select whether to use the TLS encrypted communication. Conguring the Key and Certicate for
TLS(P. 179)
<Off>
<On>
<IPv4 Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for ltering pack
ets received from devices with specied IPv4 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 171)
<Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <IPv4 Address
Filter> <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
<IPv6 Addr
ess Filter>
Enable or disable settings for ltering pack
ets received from devices with specied IPv6 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 171)
< Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
242
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <IPv6 Address
Filter> <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
<MA
C Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for ltering pack
ets received from devices with specied MAC addresses.
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 174)
<Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <MAC Address Filter>
<Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
<Select Country/Region>
*1
Specify the country or r
egion where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting
selected at initial power-on.
<Austria (AT)>
<Belarus (B
Y)>
<Belgium (BE)>
<Czech Republic (CZ)>
<Denmark (DK)>
<Egypt (EG)>
<Finland (FI)>
<France (FR)>
<Germany (DE)>
<Greece (GR)>
<Hungary (HU)>
<Ireland (IE)>
<Italy (IT)>
<Jordan (JO)>
<Luxembourg (LU)>
<Netherlands (NL)>
<Norway (NO)>
<Poland (PL)>
<Portugal (PT)>
<Russia (RU)>
<Saudi Arabia (SA)>
<Slovenia (SI)>
<South Africa (ZA)>
<Spain (ES)>
<Sweden (SE)>
<Switzerland (CH)>
<Ukraine (UA)>
Setting Menu List
243
<Great Britain (GB)>
<Other>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Select Country/Region> Select a country or
r
egion
<Remote UI Settings>
*2
Congur
e settings for using the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to congure machine settings from a Web
browser.
<Use Remote UI>
Select whether to use the Remote UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 196)
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings> <Use Remote UI> Select
<Off> or <On>
<Remote UI Access Security Settings>
Specify so that entry of a PIN is required for access to the Remote UI. Set a PIN of up to 7 digits. All users use a
common PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 166)
<Off>
<On>
<Remote UI Access PIN>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI Access Security
Settings> <On> Enter a PIN <Apply> Enter the PIN (Conrm) <Apply>
<Auto Online for Remote Scan>
When scanning fr
om the computer, use this to specify whether to automatically go online for remote scanning (scan
standby mode) without using the operation panel.
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
244
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Auto Online for Remote Scan> Select <Off> or
<On>
<Display Job Log>
Select whether to display printing logs on the machine display
.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Display Job Log> Select <Off> or <On>
<Use as USB Device>
Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer. Restricting the USB
Connection with a Computer
(P. 194)
<Off>
<On>
<Enable Product Extended Survey Program>
Enable or disable the Pr
oduct Extended Survey Program (a program for the machine usage survey).
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Enable Product Extended Survey Program> Select
<Off> or <On>
<Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)>/<Display Consumables Info.
(Toner Status)>
Set whether to display a button in the Remote UI or Toner Status for accessing the Web site for purchasing toner
cartridges, etc. Also set whether to use Toner Status.
<Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>
*2
<Off>
<On>
Setting Menu List
245
<T
oner Status Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Displ. Purchase Button>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)> Specify
the settings
<Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>
Select <Off> to pr
event a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges, etc. from being displayed in
the Remote UI.
<Toner Status Settings>
If you do not want to use Toner Status, select <Off>. To prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing
toner cartridges, etc. from being displayed in Toner Status, select <On> and then <Off>.
<Google Cloud Print Settings>
*2
Enable or disable Google Cloud Print. Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 157)
<Enable Google Cloud Print>
<Off>
<On>
<Google Cloud Print Registr
ation Status>
<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language
when it is connected to a computer b
y using Plug and Play.
<Network>
*2
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is detected o
ver the network.
<UFRII LT>
<UFRII LT (V4)>
<USB>
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is connected to a computer via USB
.
Setting Menu List
246
<UFRII LT>
<UFRII LT (V4)>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)> Select <Network>
or <USB> Select a page description language Restart the machine
<UFRII LT>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII L
T printer.
<UFRII LT (V4)>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII LT printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specication (XPS).
<Update Firmware>
Select ho
w to install the rmware update according to the environment of the machine.
Updating the
Firmwar
e(P. 208)
<Via PC>
<Via Internet>
*2
<Version Information>
<Initialize Eco Report Counter>
Select to r
estore the Eco Report Counter settings to the factory defaults.
Initializing Eco Report Counter(P. 210)
<Initialize Menu>
Select to r
estore the settings listed below to the factory defaults. You can restore all the settings listed below at once,
or you can restore individual settings separately.
Initializing Menu(P. 210)
<Preferences>
<Timer Settings>
<Cop
y Settings>
<Scan Settings>
<Printer Settings>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<System Management Settings>
<Initialize All>
<Initialize All Data/Settings>
Restor
es all data including logs and setting values to their default settings.
Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 211)
Setting Menu List
247
Maintenance
Maintenance .....................................................................................................................................................
249
Regular Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................... 251
Cleaning the Exterior .................................................................................................................................... 252
Cleaning the Platen Glass ............................................................................................................................. 253
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 254
Replacing the Toner Cartridge ......................................................................................................................... 255
Replacing the Drum Cartridge .......................................................................................................................... 258
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables ......................................................................................... 262
Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 263
Viewing the Counter Value ............................................................................................................................... 265
Printing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................................ 266
Consumables ..................................................................................................................................................... 268
Maintenance
248
Maintenance
2JRY-059
This chapter describes upk
eep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and adjustment of print quality.
◼ Basic Cleaning
Regular Cleaning(P. 251)
◼ Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 255)
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 258)
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 262)
Consumables(P. 268)
Maintenance
249
◼ Adjusting and Managing the Machine
Relocating the Machine(P. 263) Viewing the Counter Value(P. 265)
Printing Reports and Lists(P. 266)
Maintenance
250
Regular Cleaning
2JRY-05A
Regularly clean the machine to pr
event deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily.
Where to Clean
Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots
Cleaning the Exterior(P. 252)
Internal xing assembly
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 254)
Platen glass and the underside of the platen
glass co
ver
Cleaning the Platen Glass(P. 253)
Maintenance
251
Cleaning the Exterior
2JRY-05C
Regularly wipe the e
xterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good
condition.
1
Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
● When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.
2
Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots.
● Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild deter
gent diluted with water.
● To locate the ventilation slots, see
Front Side(P. 68) .
3
Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.
4
Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
Maintenance
252
Cleaning the Platen Glass
2JRY-05E
Regularly wipe off the dust fr
om the platen glass and the underside of the platen glass cover to prevent smudges to
be printed on originals or printouts.
1
Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
● T
urning the printer OFF erases any queued print data.
2
Open the platen glass cover.
3
Clean the platen glass and the underside of the platen glass cover.
● Clean the areas with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
4
Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely.
5
Gently close the platen glass cover.
6
Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
Maintenance
253
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly
2JRY-05F
Dirt may adher
e to the xing assembly inside the machine and cause black streaks to appear on printouts. To clean
the xing assembly, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the xing assembly when the
machine has documents waiting to be printed. To clean the xing assembly, you need plain A4 or Letter size paper. Set
the paper in the drawer before performing the following procedure.
Loading Paper(P. 86)
● Cleaning consumes the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge. Mak
e sure that there is sucient amount
remaining in the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge beforehand.
Checking the Remaining Amount
of Consumables
(P. 262)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 78)
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>.
3
Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
4
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine, and select <Start>.
➠ Cleaning starts.
Maintenance
254
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
2JRY-05H
The machine displays a message when the amount r
emaining in the toner cartridge is low. Note that the print quality
may suffer if you continue printing without resolving this issue. You can check the amount remaining in the toner
cartridges on the display (
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 262) ).
When a Message Appear(P. 255)
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 256)
When a Message Appear
The message that is displayed depends on the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. Depending on which
message is displayed, prepare a new toner cartridge ( Consumables(P. 268) ) or r
eplace the current toner cartridge
with a new one (
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 256) ).
<Pr
eparing a toner cart. is recommended.>
This message noties you that the toner cartridge needs to be r
eplaced soon. Make sure that you have a
replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print
a large job.
When this message is displayed
● When cop
ying or printing, you can continue printing the original.
Specify when this message is displayed
● You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers
this message.
<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 236)
<Toner cart. life end. Replcmt. recommended.>
This message noties you that the toner cartridge has r
eached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that
you replace the toner cartridge with a new one. You can continue printing, but the print quality cannot be
guaranteed.
Select <Status Monitor> in the Home screen <Error Information/Noticat
ion>
<Toner Cartridge End of
Lifetime> to display the pr
ocedure for replacing the toner cartridge.
To replace a consumable
Maintenance
255
● Pr
ess and hold the Reset key. On the <Output Report> screen, print the consumables status report to
nd out the cartridge name.
Printing Reports and Lists(P. 266)
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge
When you replace the toner cartridge, simple instructions on the replacement procedure are displayed on the screen.
See the on-screen instructions as well as the following procedure.
1
Lift the operation panel, close the paper stopper, and then open the toner cover.
2
Remove the toner cartridge.
Do not shake or tilt the toner cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the toner cartridge, such
as b
y hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the toner cartridge to leak. Remove
the toner cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.
3
Remove the new toner cartridge from the protective package.
1
Pull the tab of the protective package on a at place.
Maintenance
256
2
Pull out the toner cartridge.
4
Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner
inside the cartridge, and then place it on a at surface.
5
Replace the toner cartridge.
6
Close the toner cover, and lower the operation panel.
LINKS
Consumables(P. 268)
Maintenance
257
Replacing the Drum Cartridge
2JRY-05J
The machine displays a message when the amount r
emaining in the drum cartridge is low. Note that the print quality
may suffer if you continue printing without resolving this issue. You can check the amount remaining in the drum
cartridges on the display (
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 262) ).
When a Message Appear(P. 258)
Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 259)
When a Message Appear
The message that is displayed depends on the amount remaining in the drum cartridges. Depending on which
message is displayed, prepare a new drum cartridge ( Consumables(P. 268) ) or r
eplace the current drum cartridge
with a new one (
Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 259) ).
<Pr
eparing a drum cart. is recommended.>
This message noties you that the drum cartridge needs to be r
eplaced soon. Make sure that you have a
replacement drum cartridge ready. Replace the drum cartridge if you see this message before you start to print
a large job.
When this message is displayed
● When cop
ying or printing, you can continue printing the original.
Specify when this message is displayed
● You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge that triggers
this message.
<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 236)
<Drum cart. life end. Replcmt. recommended.>
This message noties you that the drum cartridge has r
eached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that
you replace the drum cartridge with a new one. You can continue printing, but the print quality cannot be
guaranteed.
Select <Status Monitor> in the Home screen <Error Information/Noticat
ion>
<Drum Cartridge End of
Lifetime> to display the pr
ocedure for replacing the drum cartridge.
To replace a consumable
Maintenance
258
● Pr
ess and hold the Reset key. On the <Output Report> screen, print the consumables status report to
nd out the cartridge name.
Printing Reports and Lists(P. 266)
Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge
When you replace the drum cartridge, simple instructions on the replacement procedure are displayed on the screen.
See the on-screen instructions as well as the following procedure.
1
Lift the operation panel, close the paper stopper, and then open the toner cover.
2
Remove the toner cartridge.
Do not shake or tilt the toner cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the toner cartridge, such
as b
y hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the toner cartridge to leak. Remove
the toner cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.
3
Remove the drum cartridge.
Maintenance
259
Do not shake or tilt the drum cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the drum cartridge, such
as b
y hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the drum cartridge to leak. Remove
the drum cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.
4
Remove the new drum cartridge from the protective bag.
5
Replace the drum cartridge.
6
Insert the toner cartridge.
Maintenance
260
7
Close the toner cover, and lower the operation panel.
LINKS
Consumables(P. 268)
Maintenance
261
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables
2JRY-05K
Use the pr
ocedure below to check the amount remaining in the toner cartridges, etc. It is particularly important to
check whether you need to have a new toner cartridge or a new drum cartridge ready before starting a large print job.
<Status Monitor> <Device Information> <Cartridge Level>
Amount Remaining in Toner Cartridge
Displays the amount r
emaining in the toner cartridges.
Amount Remaining in Drum Cartridge
Displays the amount r
emaining in the drum cartridges.
● The displayed amount r
emaining in the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge can be used only as a guide
and may differ from the actual amount.
● Other internal parts may reach the end of their lifetime before the amount remaining in the toner cartridge
or the drum cartridge reaches its lifetime.
LINKS
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 255)
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 258)
Consumables(P. 268)
Maintenance
262
Relocating the Machine
2JRY-05L
The machine is heavy
. Make sure to follow the procedure below when moving the machine to avoid injury.
1
Turn OFF the machine and computer.
● When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.
2
Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the
illustr
ation below.
● Whether the cables with "
*
" ar
e connected depends on your environment.
Power plug
Power cord
USB cable
*
LAN cable
*
3
When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridge
and the drum cartridge.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 256)
Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 259)
4
Remove the paper cover and any paper.
● If the paper guides ar
e extended, return them so that they t in the drawer.
5
Close the drawer, paper stopper, and all similar parts, and then move the machine to
a ne
w location.
● Check ho
w heavy the machine is and carry it without straining.
Main Unit(P. 325)
Maintenance
263
6
Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.
● For information about ho
w to install the machine after relocating it, see "Getting Started."
Manuals and
Their Contents
(P. 335)
Maintenance
264
Viewing the Counter Value
2JRY-05R
Y
ou can check total for the number of pages used for printouts. This total include reports and lists, in addition to
copies and printouts of data from computers.
<Status Monitor> <Device Information> <Check Counter> Check the number of pages
printed
Maintenance
265
Printing Reports and Lists
2JRY-05S
Y
ou can print reports and lists to check information such as machine settings.
Printing Lists of Settings(P. 266)
Printing Reports on the Usage Status of the Machine(P. 266)
Printing Lists of Settings
You can print information and settings registered in the machine as a list.
User Data List
You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 213) ) as well as the content that has been
r
egistered in the machine by printing a User Data List.
<Menu> <Output Reports> <User Data List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed
on the scr
een is loaded in the machine
<OK> <Yes>
Printing Reports on the Usage Status of the Machine
Y
ou can print the following machine status reports.
Eco Report
You can check the monthly total volume of printouts and the power consumption with a report. This report
includes tips that ar
e useful for saving paper and power consumption based on the usage status.
<Menu> <Output Reports> <Eco Report> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on
the screen is loaded in the machine <OK> <Yes>
● The amount of po
wer consumption may vary depending on the environment and conditions where
the machine is used.
Consumables Status Report
You can check the consumables status installed in the machine with a report.
Maintenance
266
<Menu> <Output Reports> <Consumables Status Report> Check that the size and type of
paper displayed on the scr
een is loaded in the machine
<OK> <Yes>
Maintenance
267
Consumables
2JRY-05U
The following is a guide to the estimated replacement time for the consumables used in
this machine. Pur
chase consumables at your local authorized Canon dealer. Observe
safety and health precautions when storing and handling consumables. For optimum
print quality, using Canon genuine Toner, Cartridge and Parts is recommended.
● T
o handle and store consumables, observe precautions in "Getting Started" provided for this product.
● Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or original type, you may need to replace
consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.
◼ T
oner Cartridges
Supplied T
oner Cartridge
The average yield and the weight of the toner cartridge that comes with the machine are shown below.
● Average yield
*
700 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 0.3 kg
Replacement T
oner Cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield and weight of toner cartridge
Canon Toner Cartridge 047
● Aver
age yield
*
1,600 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 0.3 kg
*
The average yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19752" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner
cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer
components" issued by ISO [International Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default
print density setting.
Maintenance
268
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges
● Please be awar
e that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of
counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not
responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see canon.com/counterfeit.
● When r
eplacing toner cartridges, see
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 255) .
◼ Drum Cartridges
Supplied Drum Cartridge
The aver
age yield and the weight of the drum cartridge that comes with the machine are shown below.
● Average yield
*
12,000 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 0.2 kg
Replacement Drum Cartridges
For optimum print quality
, using Canon genuine drum cartridges is recommended.
Canon Genuine Drum Cartridge Average yield and weight of drum cartridge
Canon Drum Cartridge 049
● Aver
age yield
*
12,000 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 0.2 kg
*
The aver
age yield is on the basis of our evaluation criteria when printing at 2-sheet intervals (2-sheet intermittent) of plain
A4 size paper.
Be careful of counterfeit drum cartridges
● Please be awar
e that there are counterfeit Canon drum cartridges in the marketplace. Use of
counterfeit drum cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not
responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit drum cartridge.
For more information, see canon.com/counterfeit.
Maintenance
269
● When r
eplacing drum cartridges, see
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 258) .
Maintenance
270
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................
272
Common Problems ............................................................................................................................................ 274
Installation/Settings Problems ..................................................................................................................... 275
Copying/Printing Problems .......................................................................................................................... 279
When You Cannot Print Properly ...................................................................................................................... 282
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ............................................................................................................ 284
Paper Creases or Curls ................................................................................................................................. 293
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ................................................................................................................................ 295
A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed ........................................................ 296
Countermeasures for Each Message ............................................................................................................ 297
Countermeasures for Each Error Code ......................................................................................................... 307
Clearing Paper Jams .......................................................................................................................................... 308
Paper Jams inside the Machine ..................................................................................................................... 309
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved .................................................................................................................. 313
Troubleshooting
271
Troubleshooting
2JRY-05W
When a pr
oblem occurs, check this chapter to nd out solutions before contacting Canon.
◼ Common Problems
This section describes how to take action when you suspect that the machine is malfunctioning.
Common
Pr
oblems(P. 274)
◼ When Y
ou Cannot Print Properly
This section describes how to take action when printing results are not satisfactory or the paper creases or curls.
When You Cannot Print Properly(P. 282)
◼ A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Err
or Code) is Displayed
This section describes how to take action when a message or error code (three digits) appears on the display.
A
Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Err
or Code) Is Displayed(P. 296)
◼ Clearing Paper Jams
This section describes ho
w to take action when a paper is jammed.
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 308)
◼ When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
If a problem persists, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 313) to nd out wher
e to contact.
Troubleshooting
272
Troubleshooting
273
Common Problems
2JRY-05X
If you encounter pr
oblems when using the machine, check the items in this section before contacting us. If the
problems persist, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Check the Following
Is the machine turned ON? Is the power cord connected?
● If the machine is turned ON but does not r
espond, turn it OFF, check whether the power cord is connected
correctly, and turn it back ON. For information on connecting the power cord, see Getting Started.
Manuals and Their Contents(P. 335)
Is the machine connected via wireless LAN, a LAN cable, or a USB cable?
● Check whether the machine is connected corr
ectly. When connecting the machine to a wireless LAN, check
whether the Wi-Fi icon appears on the screen. If the Wi-Fi icon is not displayed, the machine is not connected
to the wireless LAN.
Parts and Their Functions(P. 67)
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN(P. 276)
Is sleep mode activated?
● If you leave the machine unattended for a specic period of time, it enters sleep mode for po
wer
conservation, not allowing you to operate it.
To cancel sleep mode, press any key other than the power switch.
Is any message displayed on the screen?
● If a pr
oblem occurs, a message is displayed.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 297)
If a pr
oblem persists even after checking
Click the link that corresponds to the problem.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 275)
Copying/Printing Problems(P. 279)
Troubleshooting
274
Installation/Settings Problems
2JRY-05Y
See Common Problems(P. 274) also.
Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection(P. 275)
Problem with the USB Connection(P. 278)
Problem with the Print Server(P. 278)
Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection
The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time.
● The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time. The following can be used at the
same time: a USB cable and a wireless LAN, or a USB cable and a wired LAN.
Remote UI is not displayed.
● Are <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> set to <On>?
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 195)
Disabling Remote UI(P. 196)
● If the machine is connected to a wir
eless LAN, check that the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen and
that the IP address is set correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.
Home Screen(P. 78)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)
● If the machine is connected to a wir
ed LAN, check that the cable is connected rmly and the IP address is set
correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 14)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)
● Ar
e you using a proxy server? If so, add the machine's IP address to the [Exceptions] list (addresses that do
not use the proxy server) in the Web browser's proxy settings dialog.
● Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is
incorrectly entered, the Remote UI cannot be displayed. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to
set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 170)
<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 242)
<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 242)
<MAC Address Filter>(P. 243)
A connection to a network cannot be established.
● The IP addr
ess may not be set correctly. Set the IP address again.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 27)
● When you connect the machine to a computer via wir
eless LAN, check whether the machine is properly
installed and ready to connect to the network.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN(P. 276)
Troubleshooting
275
You are unsure of the set IP address. Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)
The connection method cannot be switched between a wir
ed LAN and a wireless
LAN.
● Did you select a wired LAN or a wireless LAN on the operation panel on the machine as well? This selection is
required to have the machine switch to your selection.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 13)
Y
ou are unsure of the SSID or the network key of the wireless router to be
connected. The SSID is not displayed on the screen.
● Check whether the SSID can be found on the wireless router or package box.
● Check the SSID or the network key of the wireless router by using Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 26)
The SSID of the wir
eless router to be connected is not displayed in the access
point list.
● Check whether the SSID is correct.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 26)
● If the SSID of the wir
eless router is hidden (using a stealth mode
*
), set the SSID to be visible on the wireless
router.
*
A mode that disables the SSID auto-detection of other de
vices.
● Check whether the machine is pr
operly installed and ready to connect to the network.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN(P. 276)
The machine dials up to an unintended connection destination (if a dialup r
outer
is connected to a network).
● If a dialup router does not need to pass broadcast packets, set the dialup router so that the broadcast
packets will not pass. If the dialup router needs to pass broadcast packets, check whether the settings are
correct.
● If a DNS server is located in an external network, set the IP address to be connected, not the host name, even
if connecting to the devices that are on the network that is connected to the machine.
● If a DNS server is located on a network that is connected to the machine and the information about the
devices that are connected to an external network is registered to the DNS server, check whether the settings
are correct.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN
Check the status of your computer.
● Have the settings of the computer and the wir
eless router been completed?
● Are the cables of the wireless router (including the power cord and LAN cable)
correctly plugged in?
● Is the wireless router turned on?
Troubleshooting
276
If the problem persists even after checking the above:
● T
urn off the devices, and then turn them on again.
● Wait for a while, and try again to connect to the network.
Check whether the machine is turned ON.
● If the machine is turned ON, turn it OFF
, and then turn it back ON.
Check the installation site of the machine and the wireless router.
● Is the machine too far fr
om the wireless router?
● Are there any obstacles such as walls between the machine and the wireless router?
● Are there any appliances such as microwave ovens or digital cordless phones that
emit radio waves near the machine?
Perform one of the following settings again.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 17)
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 19)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 21)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23)
When you need to manually set up the connection
If the wir
eless router is set as described below, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN
connection (
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23) ).
● ANY connection r
efusal
*
is activated.
● The WEP key that was automatically generated (hexadecimal) is selected.
● The stealth mode is activated.
*
A function in which the wir
eless router refuses the connection if the SSID on the device to be connected is set to "ANY"
or is blank.
When you need to change the settings of the wireless router
If the wir
eless router is set as described below, change the settings of the router.
● The MAC address packet ltering is set.
Troubleshooting
277
● When only IEEE 802.11n is used for the wir
eless communication, WEP is selected or the WPA/WPA2
encryption method is set to TKIP.
Problem with the USB Connection
Cannot communicate.
● Change the USB cable. If you ar
e using a long USB cable, replace it with a short one.
● If you are using a USB hub, connect the machine directly to your computer using a USB cable.
Problem with the Print Server
Y
ou cannot nd the print server to connect to.
● Are the print server and computer connected correctly?
● Is the print server running?
● Do you have user rights to connect to the print server? If you are not sure, contact the server administrator.
● Is [Network discovery] enabled?
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 341)
Y
ou cannot connect to a shared printer.
● On the network, does the machine appear among the printers of the print server? If it is not displayed,
contact the network or server administrator.
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 342)
Troubleshooting
278
Copying/Printing Problems
2JRY-060
See Common Problems(P. 274) also.
Printing/copy results are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls. When You
Cannot Print Pr
operly(P. 282)
You cannot print.
● Can you print a Windo
ws test page? If you can print a Windows test page, there is no problem with the
machine or the printer driver. Check the print settings of your application.
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 343)
If you cannot print a test page, check the follo
wing according to your environment.
Wireless LAN connection
● Check the connection status (signal strength) of the wireless LAN.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)
● If the connection is poor, try the following.
- Change the channel of your wireless LAN router. If you have more than one router, set the channels to
be at least ve channels apart.
- If you can change the radio output power of your wireless LAN router, raise the output power.
● If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN, are the computer and this machine using the same
wireless LAN router SSID? If they are different, reset the wireless LAN connection settings of this machine.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 34)
Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 347)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)
When you reset wireless LAN connection settings
● As the wireless LAN router, select the one with the SSID to which the computer is connected.
● Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 345)
Conguring Printer Ports(P. 39)
● Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are incorrectly entered,
you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to set <IPv4
Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 170)
<IPv4 Address Filter> (P. 242)
<IPv6 Address Filter> (P. 242)
● Disable security software and other resident software.
● Reinstall the printer driver.
Installing Drivers(P. 60)
Troubleshooting
279
● Can
you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Wired LAN connection
● Have you selected the corr
ect port? If there is no port to use, create a port.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 345)
Conguring Printer Ports(P
. 39)
● Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is
incorrectly entered, you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation
panel to set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 170)
<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 242)
<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 242)
<MAC Address Filter>(P. 243)
● Disable security softwar
e and other resident software.
● Reinstall the printer driver.
Installing Drivers(P. 60)
● Can
you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
USB connection
● Have
you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use or you are not sure, reinstall the printer
driver. When you reinstall the printer driver, the correct port is created automatically.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 345)
Installing Drivers(P. 60)
● Is bidir
ectional communication enabled? Enable bidirectional communication, and restart the computer.
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 346)
● Disable security softwar
e and other resident software.
● Connect to another USB port on the computer.
● Can you print from a USB connection to another computer? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Via print server
● Can
you print from the print server? If you can print from the print server, check the connection between
the print server and your computer.
Problem with the Print Server(P. 278)
● Disable security softwar
e and other resident software.
● Reinstall the printer driver.
Installing Drivers(P. 60)
● Can
you print from other computers via the print server? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
● Has an error occurred? Check the job log.
Checking the Copying Status(P. 109)
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 123)
Printing seems to be slow.*
● Print or delete data in memory
.
Troubleshooting
280
*
When the fr
ee space in memory is running low, the processing speed of the machine becomes slow, just as a computer
does. There is nothing abnormal.
You cannot print with Google Cloud Print. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 157)
It takes a long time before printing starts.
● Did you print to narr
ow width paper? After you print to narrow width paper, the machine may cool itself to
maintain the print quality. As a result, it may take some time before the next job is printed. Wait until the
machine is ready to print. Printing will resume when the temperature inside the machine has fallen.
Troubleshooting
281
When You Cannot Print Properly
2JRY-061
If printing r
esults are not satisfactory, or paper creases or curls, try the following solutions. If the problems persist,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
◼ Problems with Image Quality
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory(P. 284)
Smudge Marks Appear on the
Edge of Printouts(P
. 284)
Smudges Appear on
Printouts
(P. 284)
Afterimages Appear in Blank
Ar
eas(P. 285)
Toner Smudges and Splatters
Appear
(P. 285)
Printouts Are Faded(P. 286) A Portion of the Page Is Not
Printed(P
. 288)
Streaks Appear/Printing is
Une
ven(P. 288)
Printouts Are Entirely or
Partially Gr
ayish(P. 289)
White Spots Appear(P. 290)
Troubleshooting
282
Spots Appear(P. 291) Reverse Side of Paper is
Smudged
(P. 292)
Printed Barcode Cannot Be
Read(P
. 292)
◼ Pr
oblems with Printout Paper
Paper Creases or Curls(P. 293)
Paper Creases(P. 293) Paper Curls(P. 293)
◼ Problems with Paper Feed Paper Is Fed Incorrectly(P. 295)
Printouts Are Skewed(P. 295) Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together(P. 295)
Troubleshooting
283
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory
2JRY-062
Dirt inside the machine may affect printing r
esults. Perform care and cleaning to the machine rst.
Regular
Cleaning
(P. 251)
Smudge Marks Appear on the Edge of Printouts
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check
the supported paper types and replace with an appropriate type. Also, set the paper size and type
correctly.
Available Paper(P. 328)
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 95)
Do you print data without margins?
● This
symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 5 mm or less around the
edge of paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine. Make
sure to have margins around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab
[Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]
Smudges Appear on Printouts
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and r
eplace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 328)
Loading Paper(P. 86)
● If
using the appropriate paper still does not solve the problem, changing the <Special Printing Mode A> or
<Special Printing Mode Z> setting may solve the problem. <Mode 2> can improve the quality more
signicantly than <Mode 1>.
Troubleshooting
284
<Special Processing>(P. 236)
Afterimages Appear in Blank Areas
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and r
eplace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 328)
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?
● Check
how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 255)
Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?
● Check
how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 258)
Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 328)
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Troubleshooting
285
● Setting <Special Printing Mode U> to <On> may solve the pr
oblem.
<Special Processing>(P. 236)
Are you using paper containing much paper dust or other dust particles?
● Smudges
may appear in a printout when the paper has a lot of paper dust or other dust particles. Setting
<Special Printing Mode L> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 236)
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?
● Check
how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 255)
Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?
● Check
how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 258)
Printouts Are Faded
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check
usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings
properly.
Available Paper(P. 328)
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 95)
Ar
e you using paper containing much paper dust?
● Using paper containing much paper dust may result in a faded or streaky printout. Setting <Special
Printing Mode G> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 236)
Troubleshooting
286
Ar
e you using rough-surface paper?
● Printed images may be faint when they are printed on rough-surface paper. Setting <Special Printing
Mode Q> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 236)
● Setting this to <On> may affect the image quality
.
Ar
e you using the machine in an environment with high humidity?
● Setting <Special Printing Mode T> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 236)
● Printed images or te
xt may be blurred when you set this to <On> and print in a low-humidity environment.
Did you print on the back of a printed sheet?
● Printing
may be faint when you print on the back of a printed sheet. Setting <Special Printing Mode R> to
<On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 236)
● If
you set to <On>, image quality may be affected or a paper jam may occur when a certain length of time
elapses after printing on the front side or depending on the ambient humidity.
Is the machine installed in the appr
opriate environment?
● Install the printer in an appropriate location.
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?
● Check
how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 255)
Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?
● Check
how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 258)
Troubleshooting
287
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed
Do you print data without margins?
● This
symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 5 mm or less around the
edge of paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine. Make
sure to have margins around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab
[Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]
Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?
● If the paper guides ar
e too loose or too tight, part of a document may not be printed.
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Streaks Appear/Printing is Uneven
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and r
eplace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 328)
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Is the platen glass dirty?
● Clean the platen glass.
Cleaning the Platen Glass(P. 253)
Have you cleaned the xing unit?
● Clean the xing unit.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 254)
Troubleshooting
288
Ar
e you using rough-surface paper?
● Printed images may be faint when they are printed on rough-surface paper. Setting <Special Printing
Mode Q> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 236)
● Setting this to <On> may affect the image quality
.
Are you using the machine in an environment with high humidity?
● Change the setting for <Special Printing Mode T>. Setting this item to <On> may solve the pr
oblem.
<Special Processing>(P. 236)
● Printed images or te
xt may be blurred when you set this to <On> and print in a low-humidity environment.
Ar
e you using paper containing much paper dust?
● Using paper containing much paper dust may result in a faded or streaky printout. Setting <Special
Printing Mode G> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 236)
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?
● Check
how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 255)
Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?
● Check
how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 258)
Printouts Are Entirely or Partially Grayish
Troubleshooting
289
Is <Correct Density> in <Copy Settings> set too dark?
● Adjust the setting so that density is lighter.
<Correct Density>(P. 232)
Does the original have background color, is it stained, or are you copying an
original such as a ne
wspaper that is printed on thin paper so that text or images
on the other side are visible through the paper?
● Check the original and then adjust the density to the correct settings.
Basic Copy Operations(P. 105)
Ar
e you using a specic type of paper?
● The printed side may come out in grayish color for certain type of paper. Check the type of paper you are
using and try a different type.
Available Paper(P. 328)
● Setting <Special Printing Mode U> or <Special Printing Mode G> to <On> may solve the pr
oblem.
<Special Processing>(P. 236)
● A desir
able effect may not be attained even with these settings applied.
Is the machine installed in the appropriate environment?
● Install the printer in an appr
opriate location.
● Store the toner cartridge in an appropriate location for two to three hours, then try printing again. This
may solve the problem. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 255)
Has the drum cartridge been left in direct sunlight for a long period of time?
● Stor
e the drum cartridge in an appropriate location for two to three hours, then try printing again. This
may solve the problem. If the problem persists, replace the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 258)
White Spots Appear
Troubleshooting
290
Ar
e you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
● Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Ar
e you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 328)
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?
● Check
how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 255)
Is the amount r
emaining in the drum cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 258)
Spots Appear
Have you cleaned the xing unit?
● Clean the xing unit.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 254)
Troubleshooting
291
Reverse Side of Paper is Smudged
Have you loaded paper that is smaller than the size of the print data?
● Check to mak
e sure that the paper size matches the size of the print data.
Have you cleaned the xing unit?
● Clean the xing unit.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 254)
Printed Barcode Cannot Be Read
Are you trying to read a small barcode or one with thick lines?
● Enlar
ge the barcode.
● Changing the <Select Line Width> setting may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 236)
Troubleshooting
292
Paper Creases or Curls
2JRY-063
Paper Creases
Is paper loaded correctly?
● If paper is not loaded belo
w the load limit line or is loaded obliquely, it may crease.
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
● Replace with appr
opriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and r
eplace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 328)
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Paper Curls
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check
usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings
properly.
Available Paper(P. 328)
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 95)
● Change
the setting of <Paper Type> to a setting for thinner paper. For example, if the current setting is
<Plain (71-89 g/m²)>, change it to <Plain L (61-70 g/m²)> or <Plain L2 (60 g/m²)>.
Troubleshooting
293
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 95)
Available Paper(P. 328)
● Reload the paper b
y changing the side to print on (front side/back side).
● In
rare cases the symptom may become worse depending on the paper. If this occurs, change the side to
print on back to the previous side.
Ar
e you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
● Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Troubleshooting
294
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly
2JRY-064
Printouts Are Skewed
Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?
● If the paper guides ar
e too loose or too tight, the printouts are skewed.
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Are you printing on curled envelopes?
● Uncurl the envelopes, and print again.
Loading Envelopes(P. 92)
Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together
Is paper loaded correctly?
● Fan the paper stack thor
oughly so that paper is not stuck together.
● Check whether paper is loaded correctly.
Loading Paper(P. 86)
● Check
whether the number of sheets of paper loaded is appropriate and whether the appropriate paper is
used.
Available Paper(P. 328)
Loading Paper(P. 86)
● Check whether mix
ed sizes and types of paper are loaded together.
● There are cases where the paper does not load properly depending on its thickness. If this occurs, reverse
the paper orientation, or ip the paper over.
Troubleshooting
295
A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error
Code) Is Displayed
2JRY-065
When a message appears on the machine
's display, or a number (error code) prexed with "#" appears, see the
following sections to check the solution.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 297)
Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 307)
Troubleshooting
296
Countermeasures for Each Message
2JRY-066
A message appears on the display when ther
e is a problem with copy or print processing, when the machine cannot
communicate, or when some other problem prevents normal operation. Find out more information about messages in
the following list.
A counterfeit or non-Canon drum cartridge may be in use.
The drum cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon product.
● Only genuine Canon drum cartridges should be used as replacement drum cartridges.
Consumables(P. 268)
A counterfeit or non-Canon toner cartridge may be in use.
The toner cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon product.
● Only genuine Canon toner cartridges should be used as r
eplacement toner cartridges.
Consumables(P. 268)
Amount in cart. cannot be displ. correctly. (for toner cartridge)
The toner cartridge is not installed correctly, or there is possible trouble on the toner cartridge.
● Reinstall
the toner cartridge. If this message does not disappear after reinstalling several times, the toner
cartridge might be possibly broken. Contact the store where you purchased the toner cartridge, or consult
the Canon Customer Help Center.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 255)
Y
ou might not be using a Canon genuine toner cartridge.
● We recommend Canon genuine toner cartridges as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables(P. 268)
Amount in cart. cannot be displ. correctly. (for drum cartridge)
The drum cartridge is not installed correctly, or there is possible trouble on the drum cartridge.
● Reinstall
the drum cartridge. If this message does not disappear after reinstalling several times, the drum
cartridge might be possibly broken. Contact the store where you purchased the drum cartridge, or consult
the Canon Customer Help Center.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 258)
Y
ou might not be using a Canon genuine drum cartridge.
● We recommend Canon genuine drum cartridges as replacement drum cartridges.
Consumables(P. 268)
Troubleshooting
297
Cannot nd the access point.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, a wireless router could not be detected within a
specic period of time.
● Connect again paying attention to the time limit.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 17)
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 19)
An SSID of a wireless router was entered, but the entry was incorrect.
● Check the SSID and enter the correct one again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 26)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23)
A wireless router could not be detected due to setting problems of the network to be connected.
● Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 275)
● If the pr
oblem persists, check the security settings of the wireless router.
Cart. Comm. Error A counterfeit or non-Canon drum cart. may be in use.
The drum cartridge may not be installed correctly or may be faulty.
● Re-install
the drum cartridge. If re-installing the drum cartridge fails to clear the error message, the drum
cartridge may be faulty. Contact the store where you purchased the drum cartridge or consult the Canon
Customer Help Center.
Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 259)
Cart. Comm. Error A counterfeit or non-Canon toner cart. may be in use.
The toner cartridge may not be installed correctly or may be faulty.
● Re-install
the toner cartridge. If re-installing the toner cartridge fails to clear the error message, the toner
cartridge may be faulty. Contact the store where you purchased the toner cartridge or consult the Canon
Customer Help Center.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 256)
Check the authentication settings.
The authentication method set on the machine does not match the authentication method set on the
RADIUS server.
● Check
that the same authentication method is set on this machine and the RADIUS server, and set the
correct authentication method.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P
. 189)
Troubleshooting
298
Cooling down... Wait a moment, then try again.
The temperature of the xing assembly is high.
● Wait for a while until the xing assembly cools down. After the temperature of the xing assembly falls, try
the operation again.
Cooling down... Wait a moment.
The temperature of the xing assembly is high.
● W
ait for a while until the xing assembly cools down. After the temperature of the xing assembly falls,
the message will disappear.
Could not connect. (for Access Point Mode connection)
Connection in Access Point Mode failed due to an error.
● W
ait a few moments and try again. If you still cannot connect, turn OFF the machine, and then turn it back
on again.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 142)
Could not connect. (for Easy Connection via PC connection)
An error has occurred while starting Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode).
● Pr
ess the Back key to return to the previous screen, and then try <Easy Connection via PC> again.
● If the same message still appears after retrying <Easy Connection via PC>, turn OFF the machine, and then
turn it back on again.
Could not connect. Check the PSK settings.
The network key (PSK) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
● Check the network k
ey (PSK) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 26)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 21)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23)
● If
the problem persists even after checking the network key, check whether the machine is properly
installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 275)
Troubleshooting
299
Could not connect using the wireless LAN. (for wireless LAN connection)
A connection failed due to an error while setting wireless LAN connection.
● Restart the machine and set again.
● If the problem persists even after restarting the machine, check whether the machine is properly installed
and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 275)
● If the problem persists even after checking the wireless LAN connection, check the security settings of the
wireless router.
Could not connect using the wireless LAN. (for wireless LAN communication)
Wireless LAN communication failed due to an error.
● W
ait for a while, and set again. If you still cannot get connection, turn OFF the machine and then restart it.
Could not connect using WPS.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, the connection failed due to an error.
● W
ait for a while, and set again. If the problem persists, check whether the wireless router supports WPS.
If WPS is supported:
Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 275)
If WPS is not supported:
Set using another connecting method.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)
Could not detect any connections from wireless devices.
Mobile device detection was not possible within the predetermined length of time.
● Connect again paying attention to the time limit.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 142)
Could not perform cleaning.
Paper jammed during cleaning.
● Remo
ve the jammed paper, set paper correctly, and perform cleaning again.
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 308)
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 254)
Troubleshooting
300
Could not perform Shared Key auth. Check WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
● Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 26)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23)
● Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to
<Open System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 21)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23)
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
● Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For
more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer.
Could not set the current date and time.
The communication failed due to a network error and a timeout occurred.
● Check the network envir
onment that the machine connects with.
● Use <Current Date/Time Settings> to set the time manually, or, in [SNTP Settings], clear the [Use SNTP]
check box.
Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 9)
Conguring SNTP(P
. 58)
Could not update the device time because its battery has run out. Cannot
use Google Cloud Print if the time settings ar
e incorrect.
The machine's battery has run out and the correct time settings could not be kept.
● Set the corr
ect time again.
Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 9)
Direct Connection terminated.
Connection with the mobile device was interrupted.
● Establish Dir
ect Connection again.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 142)
Troubleshooting
301
Drum cart. life end. Replcmt. recommended.
The drum cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
● Replacement of the drum cartridge is recommended.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 258)
Drum cart. reached end of lifetime.
The drum cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
● Replace the drum cartridge with a ne
w one.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 258)
Easy Connection via PC ended due to timeout.
A connection to the computer has not been established for 30 minutes since Easy Connection via PC
(cableless setup mode) started.
● Pr
ess the Back key to return to the previous screen, and then try <Easy Connection via PC> again.
Google Cloud Print not avail. Server auth err
Cloud Print could not perform server authentication, or could not acquire information for registration.
● Check whether the date and time settings ar
e correctly specied.
<Date/Time Settings>(P. 227)
Google Cloud Print not avail. Server comm err
Cloud Print is unavailable due to an error.
● Check whether the machine is corr
ectly connected to a wired LAN or a wireless LAN.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 14)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)
● A
port that is used for Cloud Print may be blocked by a rewall or other protection. Check whether the
5222 port is available with your computer.
● If a proxy server is used on the network, check whether the proxy settings on the machine and the server
are correct. For details, contact your Network Administrator.
Setting a Proxy(P. 177)
Incorrect number of characters/invalid characters entered.
The network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of a wireless router is not entered correctly.
Troubleshooting
302
● Check
the network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine
again. For more information about how to check the network key, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 26)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 21)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23)
Insert the drum cartridge.
The drum cartridge is not set or properly set.
● Pr
operly set the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 258)
Insert the toner cartridge.
The toner cartridge is not set or properly set.
● Pr
operly set the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 255)
No Paper: Drawer 1
Paper is not loaded in the drawer.
● Load the paper.
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Paper on which r
eports or lists can be printed is not loaded.
● Reports or lists can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load A4 or Letter size paper and set its size.
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 95)
No reply from the destination.
A network cable may be disconnected, or there may be a problem in a switch.
● Check the status of the network cables and switches.
No response from host.
The machine is not connected to a network correctly.
● Check the machine and network settings, and connect again.
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 11)
Troubleshooting
303
Paper jammed.
Paper jams.
● Remove the jammed paper, and print again (Printing may resume automatically).
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 308)
Preparing a drum cart. is recommended.
Drum cartridge replacement time is near.
● Replace the drum cartridge if you see this message befor
e you start to print a large job.
Consumables(P. 268)
Preparing a toner cart. is recommended.
Toner cartridge replacement time is near.
● Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message befor
e you start to print a large job.
Consumables(P. 268)
Set the correct authentication information.
The client authentication information (key and certicate, user name and passwor
d, or CA certicate) is
not set correctly.
● Check the specied authentication method and authentication information (key and certicate, user name
and password, and CA certicate).
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P
. 189)
Size/Settings Mismatch
The paper size setting on the operation panel does not match the loaded paper size.
● Match the paper size setting specied in <Paper Settings> and the size of the paper that is actually loaded.
T
o use the loaded paper
Change the setting of <Paper Settings> to match the loaded paper size.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 95)
● If printing fr
om a computer, check whether the paper size setting in the printer driver matches the loaded
paper size.
To load paper without changing the settings
Load the paper with the size that is set to <Paper Settings>.
Loading Paper(P. 86)
Troubleshooting
304
The connection with the PC has been lost. Check the connection.
The connection to the computer was lost during a scan.
● Check the connection between the machine and the computer.
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 62)
The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Print?
A document could not be scanned due to insucient memory space.
● Cop
y the document in two or more parts.
The WEP key is not set correctly. Check the WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
● Check the network k
ey (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 26)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 21)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23)
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shar
ed Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
● Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to
<Open System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 21)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 23)
● Change
the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For
more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer.
Toner cart. life end. Replcmt. recommended.
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
● Replacement of the toner cartridge is r
ecommended.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 255)
Toner cart. reached end of lifetime.
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
● Replace the toner cartridge with a ne
w one.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 255)
Troubleshooting
305
Turn main power OFF and ON. If device does not recover, contact your
dealer or service representative.
An error has occurred with the machine.
● Turn OFF the power switch, wait 10 seconds, and turn it back ON. If the problem persists, turn OFF the
power switch, disconnect the power cord, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon
help line. Be sure to provide the displayed <Ennn-nnnn>.
Use Remote UI to set info. necessary for authentication.
The IEEE 802.1X settings are incorrect.
● Check whether [Login Name] is set corr
ectly.
● Check whether the [Use TLS], [Use TTLS], or [Use PEAP] check box is selected.
● If using TLS, check whether a "key and certicate" is registered.
● If using TTLS or PEAP, check whether a user name and password are set correctly.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P
. 189)
Troubleshooting
306
Countermeasures for Each Error Code
2JRY-067
If an err
or occurs such as when printing is not successful, the corresponding error code is displayed in the job log
screen as a three-digit number. Check the following to nd out causes and solutions for each error code. For details of
the job log screen, see
<Status Monitor> Screen(P. 79) .
#852
The machine turns OFF for some reason.
● Check whether the power plug is inserted into an outlet rmly.
#853
A document could not be printed because its data size exceeded the machine's upper processing
capability
.
● The machine may not be able to print documents with many pages. Reduce the number of pages per
printing, or print when no print job is queued or no document is being printed. If you are still unable to
print, check the document data for any defects.
Printing was canceled from the computer.
● If you cancel an operation when the print data is being sent to the machine from a computer, this error
code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print again as necessary.
Troubleshooting
307
Clearing Paper Jams
2JRY-068
If a paper jams, <Paper jammed.> is displayed on the scr
een. Press
to display simple solutions. If it is dicult to
understand the pr
ocedures on the display, see the following sections to clear jams.
Inside of the machine
Paper Jams inside the Machine(P. 309)
Output tr
ay
Paper Jams inside the Machine(P. 309)
Dr
awer
Paper Jams inside the Machine(P. 309)
When removing the jammed paper, do not turn OFF the machine
● T
urning OFF the machine deletes the data that is being printed.
If paper tears
● Remove all the paper fragments to prevent them from becoming jammed.
If paper jams repeatedly
● Tap the paper stack on a at surface to even the edges of the paper before loading it into the machine.
● Check that the paper is appropriate for the machine.
Available Paper(P. 328)
● Check that no jammed paper fr
agments remain in the machine.
● If you use paper with a coarse surface, set <Paper Type> to <Bond 1 (60-104 g/m²)> or <Bond 2 (105-163 g/
m²)>.
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer(P. 96)
Printing from a Computer(P. 119)
Do not for
cibly remove the jammed paper from the machine
● Forcibly removing the paper may damage parts. If you are not able to remove the paper, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 313)
Troubleshooting
308
Paper Jams inside the Machine
2JRY-069
Remo
ve the jammed paper according to the procedure below. Do not forcibly remove jammed paper from the
machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
1
Lift the operation panel, close the paper stopper, and then open the toner cover.
2
Remove the cartridges.
1
Remove the toner cartridge.
Do not shake or tilt the toner cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the toner cartridge,
such as b
y hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the toner cartridge to leak.
Remove the toner cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.
2
Remove the drum cartridge.
Troubleshooting
309
Do not shake or tilt the drum cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the drum cartridge,
such as b
y hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the drum cartridge to leak.
Remove the drum cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.
3
Gently pull out the paper.
4
Check whether paper is jammed inside the machine.
1
Gently pull out the paper.
● Hold both edges of the paper, pull the leading edge of the paper do
wn, and then pull it out.
5
Check whether paper is jammed in the drawer.
1
Remove the paper cover.
2
Remove any loaded paper.
Troubleshooting
310
3
Gently pull out the jammed paper.
4
Load the paper.
5
Replace the paper cover.
6
Insert the cartridges.
1
Insert the drum cartridge.
2
Insert the toner cartridge.
Troubleshooting
311
7
Close the toner cover.
➠ The paper jam message disappears, and the machine is r
eady to print.
Troubleshooting
312
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
2JRY-06A
If you cannot solve a pr
oblem by referring to the information in this chapter, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer or the Canon help line.
Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself
● If you disassemble or r
epair the machine yourself, it may not be covered by warranty.
◼ When Contacting Canon
When contacting us, have the follo
wing information ready:
● Product name (MF113w / MF112)
● Dealer where you purchased the machine
● Details about your problem (such as what you did and what happened as a result)
● Serial number (found on the label on the back side of the machine)
Checking the serial number from the operation panel
● Select <Status Monitor> <Device Information> <Serial Number>.
Troubleshooting
313
Appendix
Appendix .............................................................................................................................................................
315
Third Party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 316
Feature Highlights ............................................................................................................................................ 317
Going Green and Saving Money ................................................................................................................... 318
Improving Eciency ..................................................................................................................................... 319
Going Digital ................................................................................................................................................ 320
So Much More .............................................................................................................................................. 322
Specications .................................................................................................................................................... 324
Main Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 325
Available Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 328
Scan Function ............................................................................................................................................... 330
Printer Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 331
Management Functions ................................................................................................................................ 332
System Environment .................................................................................................................................... 333
Network Environment .................................................................................................................................. 334
Manuals and Their Contents ............................................................................................................................. 335
Using User's Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 336
Screen Layout of User's Guide ...................................................................................................................... 337
Viewing User's Guide .................................................................................................................................... 340
Basic Windows Operations ............................................................................................................................... 341
Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 349
Appendix
314
Appendix
2JRY-06C
This chapter contains technical specications of this machine, instructions on ho
w to use the User's Guide, disclaimers,
copyright information, and other important information for customers.
◼ Machine Specications
See the following section(s) when you want to check the specications of the machine, network environment, print
function, and so on.
Specications(P
. 324)
◼ Referencing the Manual of This Machine
See the rst of the following sections when you want to be sure of the kinds of the manuals describing the functions of
the machine and how to operate the machine. When you want to know how to read and use the User's Guide (this
manual), see the second section.
Manuals and Their Contents(P. 335)
Using User's Guide(P. 336)
◼ Others
See the follo
wing section(s) when you want to get useful information, and check the disclaimers and copyright
information.
Third Party Software(P. 316)
Feature Highlights(P. 317)
Basic Windows Operations(P. 341)
Notice(P. 349)
Appendix
315
Third Party Software
2JRY-06E
For information r
elated to third-party software, click the following icon(s).
MF113w
MF112
Appendix
316
Feature Highlights
2JRY-06F
This section describes tips for le
veraging the features of the machine by category. You can make use of the features
according to your intended purposes and operating environment.
Going Green and Saving Money(P. 318)
Improving Eciency(P
. 319)
Going Digital(P. 320)
So Much More(P. 322)
Appendix
317
Going Green and Saving Money
2JRY-06H
There are lots of ways to cut back on paper, toner, power, and expenses.
Print Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet Sleep Mode
To really start saving paper, shrink multiple pages onto one
side of a sheet - 2 or 4 pages for copies, and up to 16 pages
for print jobs sent fr
om your computer.
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)
(P
. 114)
Printing from a Computer(P. 119)
For saving energy and money, a sleep mode that
po
wers down a machine when nobody is using it
has become an essential feature. This machine will
enter sleep mode automatically.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 102)
Appendix
318
Improving Eciency
2JRY-06J
Here are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more ecient.
Remote Management with Remote UI Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive
Oper
ation
Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer, all
without having to go o
ver to the machine. Congure
settings and keep an eye on the machine's status with an
intuitive, easy-to-understand Web browser interface that
you'll master immediately. Save your time and energy for
things other than taking care of the machine.
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)
(P
. 197)
You can easily specify the page layout as well as
binding position, etc. intuitively on the preview
image in the printer driver. The simple click-
operation allows you to conveniently make settings
while viewing how settings are applied.
Printing from a Computer(P. 119)
Appendix
319
Going Digital
2JRY-06K
Digitalizing a document enables editing using a computer as well as reducing cost and time by using e-mail.
Scan Only What You Need Searchable PDFs
What if you're scanning a whole page of a newspaper but
all you'
re really interested in is a headline and a photo?
Use ScanGear MF. You can select what you want from a
preview, and then have the scanner disregard the rest.
Otherwise you'll have to use an editing program to crop
out everything you don't need.
Using ScanGear MF(P. 137)
● Using your pr
oduct to scan, print or otherwise
reproduce certain documents, and the use of
such images as scanned, printed or otherwise
reproduced by your product, may be
prohibited by law and may result in criminal
and/or civil liability. If you are uncertain about
the legality of using your product to scan,
print or otherwise reproduce any particular
document, and/or of the use of the images
scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced,
you should consult in advance with your legal
advisor for guidance.
Searching of text in a PDF can be done with a
"
searchable PDF." By scanning an original with both
text and images, text portions are converted by OCR
into text data. In addition to being able to search for
text information, you can also copy required portions
into an Excel spreadsheet or Word document in
Microsoft Oce. Eliminate the need to type in
customer data, addresses, etc. from scratch.
Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 127)
Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)
(P
. 134)
Appendix
320
Add Images to a Work in Progress
Some applications work with the machine to let you easily import scanned
images dir
ectly into documents you're working on. This way you can skip the
steps of opening a separate application just for receiving the scanned images
and then exporting them to the application you're really using.
Scanning Documents from an Application(P. 135)
Appendix
321
So Much More
2JRY-06L
There are a variety of features for whatever you need to do - at home, in the oce, or e
ven on the road.
Using a smartphone/tablet Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print
At times such as when you want to quickly print out a
pr
oposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a
business destination, Canon PRINT Business comes in handy.
Even in environments without a wireless LAN router, you can
connect to the machine with a mobile device wirelessly and
directly.
PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of possibilities
for work/play with functionality made for this age of speed.
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 139)
Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or
cell phone, send your data, and out come your
printed documents. With this machine, Google
Cloud Print, and your mobile de
vice, print whenever
you want from wherever you want.
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 157)
Go Wireless
Appendix
322
No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance. If you've got a WPS wireless
LAN router, bypass the settings process altogether and be ready to go before
you know it. Enjoy the kind of clutter-free and easy to use document system that
you can only get from wireless. Compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g/n for stress-free
wireless, and also supports WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for
tighter security.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 15)
Appendix
323
Specications
2JRY-06R
Specications ar
e subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
◼ Machine Specications
Main Unit(P. 325)
Available Paper(P. 328)
◼ Functional Specications
Scan Function(P. 330)
Printer Functions(P. 331)
Management Functions(P. 332)
◼ Envir
onment To Use the Machine
System Environment(P. 333)
Network Environment(P. 334)
Appendix
324
Main Unit
2JRY-06S
● For information on paper sizes and types for this machine, see "
Available Paper(P. 328) ."
Name Canon MF113w / MF112
Type Desktop
Color Supported Black and White
Resolution for Reading 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Resolution for Writing 600 dpi x 400 dpi (at default speed)
600 dpi x 600 dpi (at 2/3 speed)
Number of Tones 256
Acceptable Originals Up to 215.9 mm x 297.0 mm
Maximum thickness of original: 1 sheet
Copy Size/Copy Paper Paper Sizes
● Max: 215.9 mm x 355.6 mm
● Min: 76.2 mm x 127.0 mm
Mar
gin
● Top: 5.0 mm ± 2.0 mm
● Left or Right: 5.0 mm ± 2.0 mm
Paper Weight
60 g/m² to 163 g/m²
Paper Type
Available Paper(P. 328)
Warm-Up Time
*1
MF113w:
After Po
wering ON
15.0 seconds or less
Returning from the Sleep mode
1.6 seconds or less
MF112:
After Powering ON
15.0 seconds or less
Returning from the Sleep mode
Appendix
325
1.6 seconds or less
First Copy Time
(A4)
Approx. 9.3 seconds
Copy Speed
*2
(Plain A4)
22.0 sheets/minute
Magnication 25 % to 400 % (in 1 % increments)
Paper Feeding Capacity
*3
150 sheets (80 g/m²)/150 sheets (64 g/m²)
Paper Output Capacity
*3
100 sheets (68 g/m²)
Multiple Copies 999 sheets
Power Source AC 220 V - 240 V, 1.5 A, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption
*1
MF113w:
Maximum Po
wer Consumption
910 W or less
During Sleep Mode
● Approx. 0.7 W (USB connection)
● Approx. 0.7 W (Wired LAN connection)
● Approx. 0.8 W (Wireless LAN connection)
With the Main Power Turned OFF
0.5 W or less
MF112:
Maximum Power Consumption
910 W or less
During Sleep Mode
Approx. 0.7 W
With the Main Power Turned OFF
0.5 W or less
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
372 mm x 320 mm x 255 mm
Weight MF113w:
Main Unit
*4
Approx. 8.4 kg
Consumables
Consumables(P. 268)
MF112:
Main Unit
*4
Appendix
326
Approx. 8.4 kg
Consumables
Consumables(P. 268)
Installation Space
(W x D)
See "Getting Started".
Manuals and Their Contents(P. 335)
Memory Capacity MF113w:
RAM: 256 MB
MF112:
RAM: 128 MB
Environmental Conditions Temperature: 10°C to 30°C
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH (no condensation)
*1
May vary depending on the envir
onment and conditions under which the machine is being used.
*2
Copy/print speeds are measured based on internal testing using A4 size paper copied/printed with 100% copy/print
ratio to original on one-sided paper. Internal testing involved continuously copying/printing the same one page of
content on plain paper (copy speed is tested by copying on the platen glass). Copy/print speeds may vary depending on
paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.
The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of
a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous copying/printing.
*3
May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.
*4
The toner cartridge and the drum cartridge are not included.
Appendix
327
Available Paper
2JRY-06U
The paper types that can be used with this machine ar
e shown in the following table.
◼ Supported Paper Sizes
Paper sizes that can be loaded in the drawer is listed below.
A4 (210.0 mm x 297.0 mm)
B5 (182.0 mm x 257.0 mm)
A5 (148.0 mm x 210.0 mm)
A6 (105.0 mm x 148.0 mm)
*1
Letter (215.9 mm x 279.4 mm)
Legal (215.9 mm x 355.6 mm)
Executive (184.1 mm x 266.7 mm)
Statement (139.7 mm x 215.9 mm)
Ocio (215.9 mm x 317.5 mm)
Ocio (Br
azil) (215.9 mm x 355.0 mm)
Ocio (Mexico) (215.9 mm x 341.0 mm)
Envelope Monarch (98.4 mm x 190.5 mm)
Envelope No. 10 (COM10) (104.7 mm x 241.3 mm)
Envelope DL (110.0 mm x 220.0 mm)
Envelope C5 (162.0 mm x 229.0 mm)
Letter (Government) (203.2 mm x 266.7 mm)
Legal (Government) (203.2 mm x 330.2 mm)
Legal (India) (215.0 mm x 345.0 mm)
F4A (215.9 mm x 343.0 mm)
Foolscap (215.9 mm x 330.2 mm)
Foolscap (Australia) (206.0 mm x 338.0 mm)
3x5inch (76.2 mm x 127.0 mm)
Custom
*2
*1
Available only fr
om the printer driver.
*2
Custom paper size of 76.2 mm to 215.9 mm in width and 127.0 mm to 355.6 mm in length can be loaded in the drawer.
◼ Supported Paper Types
Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.
: Available
Appendix
328
Paper Type Drawer
Plain 71 to 89 g/m²
Plain L 61 to 70 g/m²
Plain L2 60 g/m²
Recycled 71 to 89 g/m²
Heavy 1 90 to 120 g/m²
Heavy 2 121 to 163 g/m²
Heavy 3
*1
121 to 163 g/m²
Bond 1 60 to 104 g/m²
Bond 2 105 to 163 g/m²
Labels
*2
Envelope
Envelope H
*3
Index Card 121 to 163 g/m²
*1
When using paper of 121 to 163 g/m² with <Heavy 2> specied, select this paper type if toner is not fully x
ed and the
printouts are faded.
*2
Use A4 or Letter size only.
*3
Select this paper type if toner is not fully xed and the printouts are faded when the paper type is set to <Envelope>.
Appendix
329
Scan Function
2JRY-06W
Type Color Scanner
Original Scanning Size (Max) 215.9 mm x 297.0 mm
Resolution (Max) 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Interface USB
USB 1.1 Full-Speed, USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wir
ed LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
Protocol Supported
*
TCP/IP, USB
Output Format
*
Standard: TIFF, JPEG/Exif, PNG, PDF, PDF (Divided into Single-Page Files)
Optional: PDF Compr
ession (Standard, High), Searchable PDF
*
Some formats ar
e not supported depending on the function.
Appendix
330
Printer Functions
2JRY-06X
Type Internal
Print Size Available Paper(P. 328)
Print Speed Same as "Copy Speed" on Main Unit(P. 325)
Resolution Data Processing
600 dpi x 400 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) UFR II-LT
Protocol Supported TCP/IP: LPD
, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, WSD
Resident Fonts None
Interface USB
USB 1.1 Full-Speed, USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wired LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX (IEEE 802.3 compliant)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
Appendix
331
Management Functions
2JRY-06Y
◼ Fir
ewall Settings
● Up to 4 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specied for both IPv4 and IPv6.
● Up to 10 MAC addresses can be specied.
◼ Registration of Keys and Certicates
● If you install a key or CA certicate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:
Format
● Ke
y: PKCS#12
*1
● CA certicate: X.509 DER, PEM
File extension
● Key: ".p12", ".pfx"
● CA certicate: ".cer"
Public key algorithm
(and k
ey length)
● RSA (512 bits
*2
, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)
● ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)
Certicate signatur
e algorithm
● RSA: SHA1
*3
, SHA256, SHA384
*4
, SHA512
*4
, MD2
*5
, MD5
*5
● ECDSA: SHA1
*3
, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512
*1
Requir
ements for the certicate contained in a key are pursuant to CA certicates.
*2
The signature algorithm is available only for SHA1-RSA or SHA256-RSA.
*3
Available only for a generated key and certicate signature request (CSR) or installation from the Remote UI.
*4
Available only when the key algorithm is 1024 bits or more.
*5
Available only for installation from the Remote UI.
● The machine does not support use of a certicate r
evocation list (CRL).
Appendix
332
System Environment
2JRY-070
System Environment for WSD Scan
● Windo
ws Vista
● Windows 7
● Windows 8.1
● Windows 10
System Requirements for the Remote UI
*1
Windows
● Windows Vista / 7 / 8.1 / 10: Internet Explorer 11 or later
● Windows 10: Edge
macOS
● Mac OS X 10.6 or later
● Safari 3.2.1 or later
iOS
● Safari
Android
● Chrome
System Requirements for the User's Guide Windows
● Internet Explorer 9 or later
● Microsoft Edge
● Firefox
● Firefox ESR
● Chrome
*2
macOS
● Safari
● Firefox
● Chrome
*2
Linux
● Firefox
iOS
● Safari
*2
Android
● Chrome
*2
*1
Befor
e changing the settings of the machine, set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript.
*2
Only when viewing manuals on the Internet
Appendix
333
Network Environment
2JRY-071
◼ Common Specications
Protocol Supported TCP/IP
● Fr
ame type: Ethernet II
● Print applications: LPD, Raw, IPP, IPPS, WSD, Mopria, Google Cloud Print, AirPrint, Windows10
Mobile Print
◼ Wir
ed LAN Specications
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX (RJ-45)
◼ Wir
eless LAN Specications
Standard IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
Transmission Scheme IEEE 802.11b (Modulation system: DS-SS)
IEEE 802.11g (Modulation system: OFDM method)
IEEE 802.11n (Modulation system: OFDM method)
Frequency Range 2.412 GHz to 2.472 GHz
Maximum Radio-Frequency Power 15.9 dBm
Communication Mode
● Infr
astructure Mode
● Access Point Mode
Security (encryption method) Infrastructure Mode
● 128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP
● WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
● WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
Access Point Mode
WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)
Connection Method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup
Appendix
334
Manuals and Their Contents
2JRY-072
The manuals listed belo
w are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Getting Started Read this manual rst. It describes basic setup pr
ocedures, from removing the
packing materials to setting up the machine.
User's Guide (This Manual) This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed
using a W
eb browser. You can browse information by category or enter a
keyword to search for pages on a specic topic.
Using User's Guide(P. 336)
Appendix
335
Using User's Guide
2JRY-073
The User
's Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer or mobile device and it describes all of the
functions of the machine. You can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly nd the page you are
looking for. The section describes the screen layout of the User's Guide and how to read the Guide. You can specify
how the appearance of the User's Guide looks.
◼ Screen Layout of User's Guide
This section describes the screens conguring the User's Guide and how to use the on-screen buttons.
Screen
Layout of User
's Guide(P. 337)
◼ Viewing User's Guide
This section describes the meaning of the marks used in the User's Guide, how the keys on the operation panel and
the buttons on the computer display are represented, and other matters that help you understand the information
contained in the User's Guide.
Viewing User's Guide(P. 340)
◼ Specifying Ho
w the Appearance of the User's Guide Looks
You can change the character size used in the User's Guide, and switch the screen layout to t to the device you use to
view the User's Guide.
● If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to vie
w the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as
PDF Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies.
How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for
Search the contents
● Y
ou can nd the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the "Contents" on the left side of the
screen.
Search by keyword
● Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "envelope" or "toner cartridge," and the pages containing
the keyword are displayed. You can nd the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter
phrases such as "connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for
multiple keywords. For the organization of the search screen and how to operate the search screen, see
Search(P. 339) .
Appendix
336
Screen Layout of User's Guide
2JRY-074
The User
's Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.
Top Page
Appears when User's Guide is started.
/
Click to also display all of the sections under the chapters. Click to return to the previous display.
/
Click to toggle the display between the contents and search. When the table of contents is displayed, each
click on switches between hiding and showing the display. When the search display is shown, each
click on switches between hiding and showing the display.
Click to set parameters to determine how the User's Guide is displayed, such as character size or layout.
Click to display information on how to view the User's Guide, how to perform a search, and other
information.
/
Click to display the previous or following topic.
[Notice]
Click to vie
w important information you should know when using the machine.
Appendix
337
Topic Page
Contains information about how to congur
e and use the machine.
Navigation
See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.
Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web
br
owser.
● When
you click the icon, the current page may go dark and a pop-up window may appear. To return to
the page, click [Close] in the pop-up window.
Appendix
338
/
Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click to close the detailed descriptions.
Click to return to the page top.
Sear
ch
Click to display the search window. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and nd the page
you ar
e looking for.
[Enter keyword(s) here]
Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results. You can search for pages
containing all the k
eywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you can only search for
pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks.
Sear
ch result
Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specied keywords. From the results, locate the
page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.
● The specied k
eyword(s) are shown in bold in the search results.
Appendix
339
Viewing User's Guide
2JRY-075
This section describes the marks, buttons, scr
eens, and other items used in the User's Guide. The warnings and
cautions are also given in the "Important Safety Instructions" in the "Getting Started" included with the machine. See
also these instructions.
Marks
Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and
other information ar
e indicated using the marks below.
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully,
and mak
e sure not to perform the described operations.
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items
car
efully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or
property.
Indicates a clarication of an oper
ation, or contains additional explanations for a
procedure.
Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.
Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual
Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:
Type Example
Keys on the operation panel
/ / /
Settings displayed on the operation panel
<Timer Settings>
<Paper jammed.>
Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]
/ /
, , and on the operation panel are used to select the target item in settings, but their description is
omitted in the User's Guide. The operation for selecting <XXXXX> using or and pressing is
r
epresented as shown below in the User's Guide.
1
Select <XXXXX>.
Computer Screens Used in This Manual
Depending on the model or operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual
may slightly differ from the actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending
on their version.
Appendix
340
Basic Windows Operations
2JRY-077
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 341)
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 341)
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 342)
Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 343)
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 343)
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 344)
Checking the Printer Port(P. 345)
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 346)
Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 347)
When Printing from the Windows Store App(P. 348)
● Depending on the computer that you use, the oper
ation may differ.
◼ Displaying the Printer Folder
Windo
ws Vista
[Start]
select [Control Panel] [Printer].
Windo
ws 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start]
select [Devices and Printers].
Windo
ws 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windo
ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start]
select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windo
ws 10
[
] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [Hardware and Sound] [Devices and Printers].
Windo
ws Server 2008
[Start]
select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers].
Windo
ws Server 2016
Right-click [
] select [Control Panel] [Hardware] [Devices and Printers].
◼ Enabling [Network disco
very]
Enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on your network.
Windows Vista
[Start]
select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] select [Turn on network discovery] under
[Network disco
very].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start]
select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings]
select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windo
ws 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
[Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Appendix
341
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windo
ws 10
[
] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced
sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windo
ws Server 2008
[Start]
select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center] select [Turn on network
disco
very] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [
] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
◼ Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server
1
Open Windows Explorer.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start]
select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Windows Explorer].
Windo
ws 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [File Explorer].
Windo
ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start]
select [File Explorer].
Windo
ws 10/Server 2016
Right-click [
] select [File Explorer].
2
Select the printer server in [Network] or [My Network Places].
● T
o view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for
computers.
➠ Shar
ed printers are displayed.
Appendix
342
◼ Displaying the [Softwar
e Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen
If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after inserting the provided CD-
ROM/DVD-ROM, follow the procedure below. The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual.
The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer you are using.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] enter "D:\MInst.exe" in [Search programs and les] or [Start Sear
ch]
press the [ENTER] key.
Windo
ws 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [Run] Enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windo
ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] [Run] Enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windo
ws 10
Enter "D:\MInst.exe" in the search box click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.
Windo
ws Server 2016
Click [ ] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.
◼ Printing a T
est Page in Windows
You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.
1
Load A4 size paper in the drawer.
Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 88)
2
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 341)
3
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
Appendix
343
4
Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.
➠ The test page is printed.
◼ Checking the Bit Ar
chitecture
If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.
1
Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start]
select [Control Panel].
Windo
ws 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
Windo
ws 10/Server 2016
Proceed to step 2.
2
Display [System].
Appendix
344
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].
Windo
ws 10/Server 2016
Click [
] [Settings] [System] select [About].
Windo
ws Server 2008
Double-click [System].
3
Check the bit architecture.
For 32-bit versions
[32-bit Oper
ating System] is displayed.
For 64-bit versions
[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.
◼ Checking the Printer Port
1
Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 341)
2
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Pr
operties].
Appendix
345
3
In the [Ports] tab, check that the port is selected correctly.
If you are using a network connection and have changed the machine's IP address
● If [Description] for the selected port is [Canon MFNP Port], and the machine and the computer ar
e on the
same subnet, then the connection will be maintained. You do not need to add a new port. If it is [Standard
TCP/IP Port], you need to add a new port.
Conguring Printer Ports(P
. 39)
◼ Checking Bidir
ectional Communication
1
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 341)
2
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Pr
operties].
Appendix
346
3
In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is
selected.
◼ Checking the SSID to Which Y
our Computer is Connected
If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN network, click
, , , or in the system tray to display the
SSID of the connected wir
eless LAN router.
Appendix
347
◼ When Printing fr
om the Windows Store App
Windows Server 2012
Display the charms on the right side of the screen
Tap or click [Devices] The driver that you use [Print].
Windo
ws 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Display the charms on the right side of the screen
Tap or click [Devices] [Print] The driver that you use
[Print].
Windo
ws 10
Tap or click [Print] on the application
The driver that you use [Print].
● If you print using this method, only a limited number of print settings ar
e available.
● If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed,
go to the desktop and follow the instructions in the displayed dialog box. This message appears when
the machine is set to display the user name during printing and similar instances.
Appendix
348
Notice
2JRY-078
◼ IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1
established b
y the IPv6 Forum.
◼ Pr
oduct Information required by COMMISSION REGULATION (EU) No 801/2013 amending
Regulation (EC) No 1275/2008
Power consumption of the product in networked standby if wired network ports are connected and all wireless
network ports are activated (if they are available at the same time).
Model Name Power consumption of the product in networked standby
MF113w / MF112 3.0 W or less
● The abo
ve value(s) are the actual values for single machine, chosen arbitrarily, and may therefore vary from
the value of the machine in use. Optional network ports are not connected and/or activated in the
measurement.
◼ WEEE and Battery Dir
ectives
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this pr
oduct is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE
Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this
indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a
concentration above an applicable threshold specied in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when
you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible
impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural
resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city oce, waste authority,
approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canon-
europe.com/battery.
Batteries are not included in MF112.
Appendix
349
◼ Envir
onmental Information
Reducing your environmental impact while saving money
Power Consumption and Activation Time
The amount of electricity a device consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is designed and set
in a way to allow you to reduce your electricity costs. After the last print it switches to Ready Mode. In this mode it can
print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a time, the device switches to its Power Save Mode.
The devices consume less power (Watt) in these modes.
If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode, please
consider that this device may then only switch to a lower energy level after a longer period of time or not at all.
Canon does not recommend extending the Activation Times from the optimum ones set as default.
Energy Star ®
The Energy Star
®
programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of energy ecient
models, which help to minimise environmental impact.
Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star
®
programme for both environmental benets and
the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star
®
logo accordingly.
Paper types
This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certied to an environmental stewardship
scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can support printing on media
down to a weight of 64g/m².
Lighter paper means less resources used and a lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.
Duplex printing (Standard duplex printing products only)
Duplex printing capability enables you to print on both sides automatically, and therefore helps to reduce the use of
valuable resources by reducing your paper consumption.
The duplex function has been auto enabled during the set up and driver installation and Canon strongly recommends
that you do not disable this function. You should continue to use the duplex function to reduce the environmental
impact of your work with this product at all times.
◼ Disclaimers
● The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
● CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR
EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
◼ Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Word and Excel are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
Mopria
®
, the Mopria
®
Logo and the Mopria
®
Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Appendix
350
The Adobe PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and
other countries.
Cop
yright © 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other
countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe LiveCycle® Policy Server, InDesign, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other
countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Portions of this software are copyright © 2007 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
◼ Copyright
Reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part without prior permission is prohibited.
V_180118
Appendix
351
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
V
ersion 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
-----------------------------------------------------------
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
-----------------------------------------------------------
PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source les, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
352
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modied V
ersions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or
binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
353
- 1 -
The Software Subjected to the Other License Conditions
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions.
Table of Software
Names of Software Terms and Conditions of the
License:
See Page
Adobe PDF Scan Library 2
bldimake 5
FreeType 6
snmp 11
Incl 14
JPEG 15
math 16
mDNSResponder 17
mDNSResponder (part of mDNSShared) 21
OpenSSL 22
xpm 26
- 2 -
Adobe PDF Scan Library
Portions use software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
- 3 -
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software
Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc.,
http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation, please see
<http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
March 27, 2003
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron
XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the
"License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are
Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are
available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1997-1999 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
- 4 -
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu . This code accompanies the book: Alexandrescu,
Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied".
Portions Copyright (c) 2001. Addison-Wesley. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software
for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or
Addison-Wesley Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .
______________________________________________________________________________________
- 5 -
bldimake
Copyright (c) 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988 The Open Group
All right Reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The above copyright
notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPEN GROUP BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of The Open Group shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The Open
Group.
- 6 -
FreeType
The FreeType Project LICENSE
----------------------------
2006-Jan-27
Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by
David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction
============
The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages;
some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine,
various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
FreeType Project.
This license applies to all files found in such packages, and
which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license
affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs,
documentation and makefiles, at the very least.
This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion
and use of free software in commercial and freeware products
alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:
o We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution)
o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or
full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' usage)
o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use
it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge
- 7 -
somewhere in your documentation that you have used the
FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this
software, with or without modifications, in commercial products.
We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and
assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.
Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a
credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus
encourage you to use the following text:
"""
Portions of this software are copyright © <year> The FreeType
Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
"""
Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you
actually use.
Legal Terms
===========
0. Definitions
--------------
Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project',
and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally
distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and
Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as alpha,
beta or final release.
`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where
`using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source
code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'.
This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType
- 8 -
engine'.
This license applies to all files distributed in the original
FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and
documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its
original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive.
If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by
this license, you must contact us to verify this.
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as
specified below.
1. No Warranty
--------------
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO
USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
2. Redistribution
-----------------
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and
irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile,
display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and
sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code
forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to
authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted
herein, subject to the following conditions:
o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file
(`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to
the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered,
- 9 -
original files must be preserved in all copies of source
files.
o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that
states that the software is based in part of the work of the
FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also
encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your
documentation, though this isn't mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on
the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use
our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid
to us.
3. Advertising
--------------
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use
the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional
purposes without specific prior written permission.
We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the
following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation
or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
As you have not signed this license, you are not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted
material, only this license, or another one contracted with the
authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it.
Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType
Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms
of this license.
4. Contacts
-----------
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
- 10 -
o freetype@nongnu.org
Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as
future and wanted additions to the library and distribution.
If you are looking for support, start in this list if you
haven't found anything to help you in the documentation.
o freetype-devel@nongnu.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues,
specific licenses, porting, etc.
Our home page can be found at
http://www.freetype.org
--- end of FTL.TXT ---
- 11 -
snmp
Copyright 1988, 1989 by Carnegie Mellon University
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU not be
used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
CMU DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL
CMU BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
- 12 -
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
- 13 -
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
Copyright 1988, 1989 by Carnegie Mellon University
Copyright 1989 TGV, Incorporated
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and TGV not be used
in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
without specific, written prior permission.
CMU AND TGV DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO
EVENT SHALL CMU OR TGV BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF
USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
- 14 -
Incl
Copyright (c) 1994-96 SunSoft, Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SUNSOFT INC. OR ITS
PARENT COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of SunSoft, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from SunSoft, Inc.
- 15 -
JPEG
"this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.".
- 16 -
math
Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this notice is
preserved.
copysignf.c:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
math_private.h:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
powf.c:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
scalbnf.c:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
- 17 -
mDNSResponder
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1
through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the
License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or
are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power,
direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii)
ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software
source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form,
including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media
types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License,
as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the
Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from)
the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a
whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include
works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative
Works thereof.
- 18 -
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor
for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on
behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic,
verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are
managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding
communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not
a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been
received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby
grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to
reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work
and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants
to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this
section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily
infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such
Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or
counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes
direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that
Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any
medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following
conditions:
a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent,
trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do
not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
- 19 -
d. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You
distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the
following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source
form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by
the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the
NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own
attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the
NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as
modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different
license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies
with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted
for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without
any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the
terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or
product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of
the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the
Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or
conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work
and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract,
or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in
writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or
consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use
the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or
malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of
the possibility of such damages.
- 20 -
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You
may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability
obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only
on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You
agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted
against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by
brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be
enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name
and description of purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier
identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing,
software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing
permissions and limitations under the License.
- 21 -
mDNSResponder (part of mDNSShared)
* Copyright (c) 2003-2004, Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
* this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
* this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
* and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. Neither the name of Apple Computer, Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its
* contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
* software without specific prior written permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
* WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
* DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
* ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
* SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*/
- 22 -
OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
---------------
/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
- 23 -
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
- 24 -
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
- 25 -
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
- 26 -
xpm
Copyright (c) 1989-95 GROUPE BULL
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL GROUPE BULL BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of GROUPE BULL shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from GROUPE
BULL.
- 1 -
The Software Subjected to the Other License Conditions
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions.
Table of Software
Names of Software Terms and Conditions of the
License:
See Page
OpenSSL 2
- 2 -
OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
---------------
/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
- 3 -
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
- 4 -
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
- 5 -
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
… 11 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Canon i-SENSYS MF112 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Canon i-SENSYS MF112 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 3,35 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Canon i-SENSYS MF112

Canon i-SENSYS MF112 User Manual - German - 400 pages

Canon i-SENSYS MF112 User Manual - Dutch - 399 pages

Canon i-SENSYS MF112 Quick start guide - All languages - 444 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info